JP2020075022A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which is devised to increase interest.SOLUTION: A game machine performs a lottery on winning and losing and has an opening/closing winning port provided with an opening/closing member at a predetermined position in a game area. When the result of the lottery is a winning, the opening/closing member is opened. When the opening/closing member is opened, a game medium can pass through a first passage port and the game medium having passed through the first passage port passes through a second passage port different from the first passage port. A first count number that is the number of game media having passed through the first passage port is counted and a second count number that is the number of game media having passed through the second passage port is counted. The difference between the first count number and the second count number is determined, and the opening/closing member is opened after the difference becomes "0".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 185

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which, when a game ball wins in a starting opening in a normal gaming state, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win, and a symbol combination corresponding to a lottery result is stopped.

  When the result of the lottery is a win, a winning symbol combination is displayed by displaying a winning symbol combination.

JP, 2008-8117, A

  In this way, as the game progresses while going back and forth among a plurality of gaming states such as the normal gaming state and the winning gaming state, the player is demanding a device for enhancing the interest in each gaming state.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that has been devised to enhance its interest.

Means 1: lottery means for performing lottery on winning
An opening and closing winning port equipped with an opening and closing member at a predetermined position in the game area,
A gaming machine comprising: an opening / closing means for opening the opening / closing member when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
When the opening / closing member is opened, the game medium passes through the first passage opening, and the game medium passing through the first passage opening passes through the second passage opening different from the first passage opening. Is designed to pass through,
First detection means for detecting that the game medium has passed through the first passage opening;
Second detection means for detecting that the game medium has passed through the second passage opening;
First counting means for counting the number of game media detected by the first detecting means,
Second counting means for counting the number of game media detected by the second detecting means,
A determination unit that determines a difference between the number counted by the first counting unit and the number counted by the second counting unit,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the opening / closing member is opened after waiting for the difference determined by the determining means to become "0".
In the winning game, a round in which the opening / closing winning opening is opened once is executed a plurality of times, and when a specified number of game media enter the opening / closing winning opening in each round, the opening / closing winning opening is closed and the round ends. Further, since there is a time difference between the timing when it is determined that the specified number of game media has entered the opening / closing winning opening and the closing timing of the opening / closing winning opening, there are more than the specified number of game media opening / closing winning openings in each round. There is a possibility to enter. In the above configuration, by counting the number of game media detected by the first detection means and the number of game media detected by the second detection means, a predetermined number or more of game media are opened and closed in the round. In the case of entering, it becomes possible to count the game media in excess of the specified number as a prize for the round, and thus the number of payouts of the game media can be increased to enhance the interest (for example, paragraph [1426. ]-[1444] and FIGS. 185-186).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is devised to enhance the interest.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from below. (A) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the lower front. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raise position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower part. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of a game area in which game balls are distributed on a game board. It is a front view of a center accessory and a table production unit in the table unit of the game board. It is a side sectional view of the front effect unit along with the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a front production unit, and the reflective recessed part of a front light guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a front light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front performance unit is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front central decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front central decoration body and the lower rear central decoration body are caused to emit light by raising the lower central lifting base in the lower movable effect unit. In the lower movable production unit, the lower center elevating base, the lower left side elevating base and the lower right side elevating base are raised to illuminate the lower front central decorative body, the lower rear central decorative body, the lower left side decorative body, and the lower right side decorative body. It is the front view of the game board which is shown. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position in the state where the game board is in FIG. The four rotary decorations, the left side rotary decorations, the left subside rotary decorations, the right side rotary decorative bodies, and the right subside rotary decorative bodies in the lower movable production unit are respectively developed to schematically show the decorations of the decorative portions on each surface. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitted and displayed in a lower movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where an upper rear left decorative body and an upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive mechanism of an upper back movable production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper back movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the upper front movable decoration of an upper front movable production unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure for main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure for interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for winning, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for types of big hit, (C) is a type of small hit Is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special design stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate section passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a universal figure hit judgment table used in a lottery process for a universal figure hit, and (B) is a universal figure hit time open pattern table used in a decision process of an open pattern at the time of a hit figure. is there. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design fluctuation pattern decision processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design stop processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric auditors product opening process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production control processing performed by peripheral control MPU. (A) is a pending notice determination table used to determine a pending notice pattern for 1 o'clock hold, (B) is a pending notice determination table used to determine a pending notice pattern for 2 o'clock hold, (C) ) Is a pending notice determination table used for determining a pending notice pattern at 3 o'clock. (D) is a pending notice determination table used to determine a pending notice pattern at 4 o'clock. It is a hold change effect determination table used to determine the hold change effect pattern. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of executing the hold movement change effect as the hold change effect. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of executing the dragging change effect as the hold changing effect. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device when the billiard hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect. (A) is an over-winning performance determination table when the number of over-winning occurrences is 1, 3, 5, and 7 o'clock, and (B) is an over-winning performance determination table when the number of over-winning occurrences is 2:00 (C) is an over-winning effect determination table when the number of over-winning occurrences is 4:00, (D) is an over-winning effect determination table when the number of over-winning occurrences is 6:00, and (E) is an over-winning effect determination table. It is an over-winning effect determination table after the number of winning occurrences = 8. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of executing the big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light guide plate. It is a table showing an example of a big hit probability and a small hit probability. It is a table showing an example of a pattern of opening time and closing time of the special winning opening, which is selected in each round of the big hit game or the small hit game. (A) is a table showing an example of a time of a hit start effect (also called an opening effect), and (B) is a table showing an example of a time of a final hit effect (also called an ending effect). It is a table showing an example of an operation schedule of the special winning opening during the big hit game. It is a table showing an example of the operation schedule of the big winning opening during the small hit game. It is an enlarged front view showing an example of the outline of the composition in the first big winning a prize mouth. It is a timing chart showing an operation schedule of the movable body in the first big winning opening during the small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of production when stock can be acquired in stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of production when stock can be acquired in stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of production when stock cannot be acquired in stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of production when stock cannot be acquired in stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of production when stock cannot be acquired in stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of production when stock cannot be acquired in stock time production. It is a table showing an example of a variation time of each of the second special symbol variation of the first to fifth times since the time saving state started. It is a table showing an example of the variation time of each of the second special symbol variation of the sixth to eighth times since the time saving state started. It is an example of a variation pattern table selection table. It is an example of a stock time effect block table. It is an example of a stock production specific table. (A) is an explanatory view showing a time schedule when a small hit is won by a first special symbol variation corresponding to a prize in a time saving state, (B) is a first special symbol corresponding to a prize in a time saving state It is an explanatory view showing a time schedule when a big hit is won due to a change. It is an example of a judge production table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of final rock-paper-scissors production. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production in the big hit game. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production in the big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an effect | action when not accumulating the reservation of the special figure 2 at the time of the completion | finish of the fluctuation | variation which a hold charge effect | action is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect | action in case the hold of the 2nd special figure 2 was accumulated just before the end of the fluctuation which hold charge effect is performed. It is an example of a fixed display time selection table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a first instruction effect. (A) is a front view showing an example of a simplified configuration of a pachinko machine equipped with a performance control lever, and (B) is a left side showing an example of a simplified configuration of a pachinko machine equipped with a performance control lever. It is a side view. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the judge production using a some operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the judge production using a some operation part. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the second big winning opening. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the second big winning opening.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as seen from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose top view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

  Further, in the door frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is formed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

  The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Main frame upper hinge member 510 and main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for opening and closing the door frame 3 and opening and closing the door frame 3, a main frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640, a locking unit 650 for locking the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are provided.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect in accordance with a game state.

  Within the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B), Is equipped with. The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is transferred to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the front effect unit 2600, and the lower movable effect. The unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 and the like can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect to entertain the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling it into each main member. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right at a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side surface from a portion opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has strength and rigidity enhanced by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

  Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further to the front side. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, with the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, the upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a contact the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, which is rearward of the horizontal fixing portion, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The right upper connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and abuts the horizontal fixing portion 22a on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side being in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d that extends in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a brought into contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a contact the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the right end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in the form of a flat plate, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted by penetrating the hooking piece 25b back and forth. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically pierced in the center of the left and right side surfaces in the front-rear direction and are recessed toward the center of the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thus, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recessed portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the rearward position in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a laterally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 is provided with an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to the front surface, the rear curtain member 43 forms a curtain inner space 40a which cooperates with the front curtain member 42 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball B stays in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a that is formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that is opened upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that is opened upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d that extends upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and that the upper surface inclines so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the upper end protruding portion 44e that is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and protrudes forward, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is discharged from the first lower hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the discharge hole 60d. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, in a laterally spaced manner, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 connects the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by the two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the side of the player). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

  The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure of the speaker is prevented from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly as seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can rotate. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extending portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and a downward extending edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extension extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely leftward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

  With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock main body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that vertically penetrates the horizontal portion 60a and allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, and rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, so that it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the back.

  The door frame 3 is formed into a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 200, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper left portion of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 mounted on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the above.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) having a vertically extending outer shape in a front view, and has a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view, and the speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The door-relay relay substrate 106, the door-frame main relay substrate 104, and a part of the door-frame sub-relay substrate 105 from the rear side, and the handle-relay relay substrate 106 from the rear side. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable are provided.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening / closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved to the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for performing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, The rear side of the door frame base 101 is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the rear end of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 the height of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at a lower right corner in a front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes further forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. And a recessed portion 101c that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted into the recessed portion 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are moved forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, a top plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and which penetrate the front and rear sides. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle attaching member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from a rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

  Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 by: The axis of the tubular portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided to the front without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a rectangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And FIG. 84) are partially connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangle extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. For relaying the connection between the window interior decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portion extending vertically above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

  The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle with the outer shape extending leftward and rightward, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear handle rear board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a portion of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being open. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111, which is attached to the upper end of the left end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, which extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of vertically-spaced rear mountings of the right reinforcing frame 112 are attached to the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4. And a hook member 116 to be hooked.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper dish ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked on these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for mounting the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is vertically movably attached to the hinge bracket 121, and a flange that is attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular shape in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

  The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is located between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

  When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the upper portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is removed. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 cooperates with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can rotate.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to lock and close the door. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 to be a regular cylinder. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the tray unit body 252 of the tray unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b opening to the lower side of the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box shape that is opened at the front and that has entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A rear cover 142 which is a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of 141, and one game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143. The ball feeding member 144 supported by the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is placed on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144, respectively.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl ball removing unit 240 is assembled. Also, it is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

  The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up and down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-slipping slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-slotting button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction, facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the rod 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and at the same time, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b includes the partition portion 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked by the blocking section 144a from moving toward the ball holding section 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a), and remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the rod portion 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings vertically due to driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which swings vertically in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding actuating rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending back and forth. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 causes the iron plate 146a to be attracted toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and the ball feeding is performed with the right end as the center. The left end side near the crank 147 is rotated so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 145 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and engages with the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging part 147a, which is engageable with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction. The shaft portion 147b is disposed on the side opposite to the side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

  In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 117) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that the ball feeding unit 140 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the ball removing member 143 pivotally supported or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the side, and the ball outlet 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c is moved as the operation transmitting portion moves downward. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball-stripping member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entry port 141a and the ball-slotting port 141b. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 on which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the power is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. It can be prevented from bouncing back at 143a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape in a front view extending to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a and an upper piece portion 148a that are vertically separated at a substantially vertical center for a predetermined distance from the right side to the left side. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. . The upper piece portion 148a of the tamper proof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 to be attached to the illegal gaming ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (struck) by the ball launching device 540 when an illegal act is performed by operating the provided string and putting the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting opening or the like. By inserting the string attached to the illegal gaming ball B between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, the V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b It can be cut by the narrowed part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit body 151. And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball passage 150a that connects the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit, The through-ball passage 150a is provided with a full-ball receiving port 150b which is opened rearward on the lower right side in a front view and which is capable of communicating with the full-tank guiding path of the lower full-ball guiding unit of the main body frame 4. ..

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and has not reached the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball) and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c which are open toward the front near the lower right corner of the front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The movable piece 153 is a flat plate, and the movable piece 153. The storage tank 150e is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting a rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game ball B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing abutting portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and also the game. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 is a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis line extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and sticks out from the base portion 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis line. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When the glass unit 160 is detached from the door frame base 101, it can be detached by the procedure reverse to the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along an outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 173 projecting forward of the main body 171 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Accordingly, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  The security cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is protruded rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 to provide an outer periphery. The shaft member 187 having the drive gear portion 187a, the transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and the detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 have the handle base 181 and the inner. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in a front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

  In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 in a front view and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base 181a of the handle base 181 is formed such that the outer diameter thereof is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 has four rotary shafts (axial member 187) and four first projections 182a, second projections 182b, third projections 182c, and fourth projections 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in an arcuate shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 are locked to protrude rearward from a position inside the slit 182e with respect to the rotation center. The locking projection 182f is provided.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in a clockwise direction in a front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so as to be curved inward. The second protrusion 182b is located such that the most protruding portion of the handle 182 from the general outer peripheral surface is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion of the handle 182 that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface thereof, and is separated from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most projecting portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees. It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has a light-transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side), so that the handle mounting member 102 is The handle unit 180 attached via the terminal also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original to play the game, and reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

  Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise in the front view. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hitting"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 has an upper tray 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. Mounting base 213 attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The production operation unit 300 includes, as the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The performance operation unit 300 is mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the performance operation unit cover unit 310, the operation unit base 320 housed in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. Vibrating speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

  The whole dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the frontmost. The upper plate 201 has a front end that retracts rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side becomes lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is a state in which the plate is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

  In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground metal member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball B. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically and arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the front side. The discharged game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 in the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protruding forward, and attached to the right side of the attachment base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. An upper plate ball removal unit 240 that is mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and on the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left with respect to the left-right center in a front view, and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of a portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and the front and rear of the lower plate ball supply port 211c on the upper right side in front view. And an upper dish ball feed port 211e located at the right end of the upper dish main body 212 and extending vertically.

  In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and an upper portion on the left side of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g that penetrates through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball-removing slider 242 in the upper plate ball-removing unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101 when assembled in the door frame 3. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the plate ball and the cutout portion 211d.

  The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges more toward the front than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

  The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the dish unit 200 so that the upper end portion near the right end of the upper dish main body 212 is closed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates in the right corner of the rear end.

  The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish upper right decoration board 278, the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the plate lower right decoration board 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting projection 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and then lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, display the amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or a ball lending machine. It is for deducting the amount of the game ball B that has been rented out from the cash or the prepaid card that has been put into, and returning it.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been lent out are deducted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section displays the cash and the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing bowl and bowl after removal]
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower plate 202.

  The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placing protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removal of the upper bowl is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the unit 230 before removal of the upper bowl.

  The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and has a vertically extending cylindrical front base 231 and a front base 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the cylinder. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removing button 222, and its lower end is of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 of the upper bowl removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Is equipped with.

  The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a, which protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c protrudes rightward in rear view as compared with the part where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guiding path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a that projects forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and projects forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl, the upper bowl removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl removing slider 242 moves. Through the front slider 232, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 is positioned at the upper end of the movement. Further, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c contacting the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. Therefore, the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the two.

  Therefore, in the state where the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball guide passage 241c, and then downward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl bowl removal slider 242 moves upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation-transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

  In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decorating unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The dish unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and the dishes which are attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 280 mounted below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper plate plate decoration unit 275, respectively, over the entire surface of the plate unit body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward of the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball-draining hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate body 251 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

  The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right sides toward the center in the left-right direction in the upper portion, extends downward, and is spaced apart in the left-right direction. Includes a lower front decoration portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decoration portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270, a plate lower left decoration unit 280, a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower right decoration unit are provided on the front surface of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b. The lower side of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front face decoration portion 252b.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's finger to be inserted therein, and is formed such that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251, and a lower plate main body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom surface cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region that is below. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b, and the handle insertion hole 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion hole 252g. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are at the center in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The dish unit body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .. Further, in the state where the dish decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower dish ball punching button 263 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball punching base 261 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is exposed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removing unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and stores the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharges the game ball B from the lower dish 202 by opening and closing the lower dish ball removing hole 202a. It is for making things happen.

  The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that vertically penetrates in the right front corner in plan view, and the lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface side of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower bowl removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower bowl removal lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and vertically moves to a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the lower plate ball punching base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction at a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left end side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis, and on the right end side of the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In a normal state of the lower dish ball removing unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is substantially coincident with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When this slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole to the rear from the position of the through hole, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the lower plate bowl removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the opened state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed rearward to release the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266. It Then, when the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removing button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

  The plate upper left decoration unit 270 has a translucent plate upper left decoration 271 that extends in the left-right direction and has a semi-cylindrical shape, and a plate upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left decoration 271. And a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The plate upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is formed in a milky white color.

  The plate upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the plate upper left decoration 271 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  The plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical right and left translucent dish upper right decoration member 276, and a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decoration member 276. And a plate upper right decoration board 278 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in a milky white color.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from the rear into the dish upper right decoration body 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated and decorated.

  The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper right decoration unit 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decoration unit 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. Be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends to the left and right, and has a translucent lower plate left ornamental body 281, and a dish lower left decorator 282 attached to the rear side of the plate lower left ornamental body 281. And a plate left lower decorative substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 has a spherical shape. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc curvature that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decoration 281 is formed in a milky white color.

  The plate lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower plate left decorative body 281 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left edge. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end goes into the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is displayed. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right ornamental body 286, and a plate lower right dish attached to the rear side of the dish lower right ornamental body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward at a radius smaller than those of the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

  The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear into the plate lower right decoration body 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated and decorated.

  The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. The lower right dish unit 285 of the lower right dish unit 285 is formed into a spherical shape at the lower end of the lower dish unit 286, so that the right end of the dish unit 285 appears to be submerged in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower right decoration unit 286, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the plate lower right decoration unit 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be decorated with a substantially uniform light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The production operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is configured with an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The performance operation unit 300 is mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the performance operation unit cover unit 310, the operation unit base 320 housed in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 340. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320.

  Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Stage control unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the production operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape having an open upper portion and a rear portion.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to a front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A plate center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear inside the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted on the plate front lower light And a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 is swollen downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction to the front side, and the rear side from this is the production operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 has a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and a forward direction below the dish central upper decorating body 312a. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is formed so that the bulging half arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in the shape of a half arc. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semi-arcuate shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration body 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects more forward than the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state in which the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and at the same time, the plate center lower decorative body is The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

  Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the entire width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the plate center upper decorative member 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The lower plate center reflector 315 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center lower decoration substrate 316 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate lower central decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the plate lower central decoration 312b can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semi-arcuate shape. When the LEDs of the central upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate of the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole of each can be made to emit light substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation section cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that protrudes farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower center decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

  The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 whose outer shape is formed into a box shape having a substantially cubic shape and which is open at the upper side, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (in this case, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion that is formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and is attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 for penetrating the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opening upward and for rotatably supporting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The main body 321 of the operation section base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably about the axis extending in the left and right directions. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has the flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit seen from above and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring seen from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from above and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about the axis extending vertically and a plurality of bushes 333 that are attached to the ring mounting base 331 and move the rotation base 332 upward. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring.

  Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating portion 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating portion 302. And a ring inner cover 337 which is provided. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light-transmitting annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring attachment base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface in the circumferential direction. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a circumferentially spaced outer side from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to project downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer upper cover attaching portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral edge of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of the circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that constitutes an outer and lower portion in a circle extends in an annular shape, and an outer lower surface portion 336a that protrudes upward from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a toward the center side. A plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b, which are arranged in a vertical direction. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a tube extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c that is formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and that is arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state in which they are assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and have a donut shape as a whole. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotational drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and seen from the front left. The rotary drive unit 340 is for rotationally driving the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting a rotary operation of the rotary operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are covered from the left side. 346 and.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at constant intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, but one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

  The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to cause the drive gear 343 to repeat forward / reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

  Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the contents of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation is performed. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 340, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340, and the ring-side gear portion 350a integrally rotates to detect transmission of the rotary drive unit 340. The gear member 345 is provided with a spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting the operation ring transmission gear 350 into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and attaching the gear attachment member 351 to the operation portion base 320. Be done.

  In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is provided. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. The effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a shape in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference. The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The production operation ring decoration board 352 is made to emit light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof to pass through the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331, and outside the ring forming the rotation operation section 302. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, the player can see a light-emitting decoration such as an LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and seen from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a cylindrical center press operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation portion 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. And a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urge the elevating base 364 upward are provided.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, an elevating cam driving gear member 370, a lower end of which is connected, a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and an elevating cam member 371 that elevates and lowers the elevating base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. Central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button main body 373 and the elevating base 364 for urging the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373. A central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button operation unit 303a is configured by the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375.

  In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decoration lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and ascending / descending so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decoration lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward in the center thereof is provided. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 form an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361, respectively, from the center to the front and the rear at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating through the center with a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward due to the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c contacting the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move is formed between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downward from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

  The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the lift cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

  The central button main body 373 has a pair of guide shafts that penetrates the cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at a center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the elevating base 364, so that the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are full-color LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can cause the peripheral decoration lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and has an annular base plate portion 378a that is attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical shape that extends upward from the inner periphery of the base plate portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer circumference. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the tubular portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state in which the elevating base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upper end of the upward movement by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

  Therefore, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

  In this state (state of FIG. 62 (a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshed with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lifting cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

  In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being projected more than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of projecting below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, so that the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  In this manner, when the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating spring 368 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 stops moving downward and the guide pin 364d moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 are relayed. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65 (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation section is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation section. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged inside the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation section 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation section 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating section 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation section arranged between the central pressing operation section 303 a and the rotating operation section 302. And 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined such that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). ..

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 projects slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operating portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. ..

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward / reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 to rotate. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is larger than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. When the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened to assist. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that is easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a manner that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be grasped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs that are lined up are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By causing the light to be emitted, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

  In the normal state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than an upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation part 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and press detection is performed. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 comes off from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In the state of this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are the rotational operation portion 302. The height is almost the same as that of the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

  Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players may find it easier to perform a rotating operation with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be a hindrance to the rotational operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 that is attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402, The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating therethrough in the position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of light emitting side window decorations 410b arranged inside the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the player in the game area where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to see the game area of the pachinko machine located on the right side, or the player who is playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and it is possible to form the player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b that are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are vertically arranged, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the side window interior decoration member 412. Internal reflectors 414 are respectively inserted inside the side window decorations 410b.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416 and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is a flat plate in the up-down direction and the front-back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side inner panel 417 that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the left-right direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form the side window 410a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decoration board 418 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (in this case, three) side window interior decorations 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decoration member 412 in the side window is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 at a position on the upper side from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The side window decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

  The decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the side window decoration portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the inserted side window interior decoration portion 410b. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 has a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, the rear side thereof extends vertically in a straight line, and the front side thereof extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, the rear side extends vertically in a straight line, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and is connected to the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed so as not to transmit light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and makes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 emit light. Thus, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, since the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 that causes the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light is turned off, the side windows It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (at the end of the island equipment) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if the player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily played. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity by the other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the whole of the game area 5a difficult for a player to see, and to make it difficult for a player to feel as if being seen by another player, so that another player can play the game without hesitation. ..

  Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle and change the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b are cylindrical, light is emitted in a band shape and in a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player, such as the neighbor, to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from not being able to concentrate on the game and to feel uncomfortable due to the induction of mistakes, and to make the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame seen from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear, and FIG. 72C is a top lower cover outside. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. A top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and a door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456 which is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. I have it.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top right decoration board 457. And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 mounted near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively mounted on the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top. A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the left and right ends near the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

  The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the top surface, which is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which the semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower ends of the door frame top decorations 453 and the lower ends of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. The cage includes a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c vertically penetrating outside the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top left decoration substrate 456, the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 can be light-embellished by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decoration board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 respectively extend in the left-right direction, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating forward and backward are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, and a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay substrate 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs on these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and decorated. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

  In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction, and a coaxial arrangement in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation section 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation section 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotating operation section 302 is provided below the rotating operation section 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are mounted vertically separated from each other and Door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 410 of the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. The door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, the three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery are arranged. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be conspicuous.

  In addition, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the plate lower center decoration 312b arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a are The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is made slightly thin, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-down direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side and operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. it can.

  Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the rotation from the player is performed. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easy to see, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player immediately rotates when the player participation type effect is executed. It is possible to rotate the operation unit 302, and by operating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-back direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotation operation part 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected to the front side more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center top Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out greatly. At the same time, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and a main body frame. Main body lower hinge assembly attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 which is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base unit 500 so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 is played. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, a reverse L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank which is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape that is opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is spaced apart from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

  The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Or a lower full tank ball path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape in which a front view extends vertically and a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 detachably. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 on which the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed is placed. It is provided with a placement portion 501c and a game board regulation portion 501d which projects upward from the center of the game board placement portion 501c in the left-right direction and which restricts the lower end of the game board 5 from moving to the left and right and to the rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the front and back on the right side of the front side of the portion 501e when the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and back, which penetrates the front and rear on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view, the substrate unit. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the front side below the game board mounting portion 501c and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a that extends left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the guide body 502a that penetrates forward and backward at both upper and lower ends and is left and right. A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state where the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (desirably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

  Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle that intersects the tangent line to the circle that passes through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. A main body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have it.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-section in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving to the front and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4 as a game board. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543, the launching solenoid 542, which is a rotary solenoid whose axis penetrates the launching base 541 and extends forward, the hitting hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the hitting solenoid 542, A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll is provided.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

  Note that, due to the driving strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with the width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose front-rear direction width is approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From the upper part of the back plate 551d that extends downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side to a position near the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g that extends to substantially the same position as the right side of the left back plate 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h that connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and the inside of the L shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward is provided.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and is located on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end portion of the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B circulating in two stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

  Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

  The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game sphere B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left part 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 from the rear side, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the gaming ball B can flow, and is open forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the movement of the movable piece member 573 are detected to detect the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while being repeatedly folded back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

  The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a box-like opening to the rear, through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. It is provided with a flat dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and meshes with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and the payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581, and the payout device rear side. It is possible to hold the ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing passage 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the position where the ball-removing movable piece 592 closes the ball-removing passage 580b. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right widths and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer circumference of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape of a concentric circle with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached in the part where the payout passage 580a and the takeout passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a protruding rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rearward in a rear view at a position at a height of about 1/3 from above. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form a side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-removing movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout vane 589 is provided with three vane pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in a portion that extends toward the rotation axis from above in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout vane 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

  The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

  The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. A part of the ball pull-out lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear cover 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding part. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. Therefore, it will flow down to the side of the ball passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B. It will flow down sooner.

  In this way, in the state in which the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, and thus the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can move to the outside of the inner surface of the ball-removing passage 580b, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. There is no pinching between the wall surface of the withdrawal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent a strong force from acting on the ball withdrawal movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and withdrawal of the ball due to the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and damage of the piece 592.

  From this, since it is possible to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b faster, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, when the ball-removing movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball-removing passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the gap is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  Then, by blocking the movement of the game ball B to the outside by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is based on the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

  The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 and a box-shaped upper front full base 601 which is attached to the rear side and has an open front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and that can push the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in a front view and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

  Further, the upper tank bulb path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends about 3/4 of the overall width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper tank discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball-removing passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in order and open downward. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

  In the lower tank full ball passage unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up in order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in front view, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, front opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 as viewed from the front, and the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to contact the door opening / closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  In the state where the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are respectively installed in the upper fullfiller passage 610c. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

  Further, in the state where the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are opened, and the lower ball dispensing unit 610a communicates with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is opened. Is rotated clockwise in a front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 which is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of a ball out by the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it is understood that the game balls B are stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game ball B housed in the ball storage portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B emitted from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball delivery path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storing passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

  When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out further, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. While the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received by After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

  When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine taken along the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed to the front in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b which projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends obliquely downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is mainly a cone type speaker that outputs a low tone.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and a portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most to the rear side. Are formed so that the protrusion of the is small. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 as viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. This enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in a front view in the speaker cover 621. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43a so that the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inserted. The space and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 can form an enclosure 624 of a wide space, and the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 can be formed. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space (part of the enclosure 624) behind the body frame speaker 622 is extended to the right in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the lower outer frame assembly 40 side through the connection tubular portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 by being resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in the state in which the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives the game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 and that is open upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball pulling-out guide portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is discharged downward.

  The upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is open to the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end is open to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball drop guiding portion 627 is opposed so that the opening at the upstream end thereof coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long in the left and right directions. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guide portion 627 at the front end, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guide portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

  The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (see FIG. 97)). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board or the like of the game board 5. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

  The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the interface board 635 and the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The right side of the back cover 640 in front view is attached to the rear end of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and the left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate that extends vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the dispensing base 551 is assembled to the body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating forward and backward and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 which is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 which project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  In the locking unit 650 assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are located forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and keeps the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, when a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of locking cylinders 650 are transferred via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, so that the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is a front view showing the inside of a game area in which game balls are distributed on the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 100). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning in the game area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the operation of driving the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so that the mouth 2006 or the like can be received or passed.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game region 5a that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion on the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is inside the game area 5a (see FIG. 100). Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the game is carried out by hitting the game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97 and 117 etc.) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be received according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. A first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, in which it is possible to receive the game ball B in either of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B, To Eteiru.

  The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200, which has two general winning openings 2001 and is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100, and the vertical center at the right end in the front view inside the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 that has a gate portion 2003 that is attached to the lower side, and one general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 that are attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a box-like shape whose front is open, and a square opening which is closed by detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 from the rear side to the rear wall. And a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300, which are mounted in the rear box.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stopper 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

  The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1010 matches the notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 holds a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to the rear surface of which the back unit 3000 is attached.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and has a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. Has been done. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a and is formed with an out recess 1111 which is recessed upward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder detachably holds the panel plate 1110, is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is provided with a through hole having an inner side penetrating in the front-rear direction with substantially the same size as the game area 5a. ing.

  Further, the panel holder includes a notch portion that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is provided on the rear surface. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface. The discharge portion 1201 formed in the above can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 117) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second starting opening sensor 2511, a first count sensor 2512, a second counting sensor 2513, a specific area sensor 2512a, a starting opening solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid. 2515, a second attacker solenoid 2516, a distribution solenoid 2111, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game status (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400, a detailed illustration of which is omitted in the figure, includes a status indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two normal lottery results selected by the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of LEDs and a normal reservation display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first start port 2002, and the first start port 2002. Lottery by the first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the reserve number (first reserve number) related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 and the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 From a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that display the result of the second special lottery, and two LEDs that display the number of reserves (the second number of reserves) for receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 And a second special reserved number display.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of at least one of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 ( A round indicator including five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds) is provided.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on / off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 117. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit controls the effect presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box (not shown) that houses the peripheral control board 1510. , Are provided. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box, approximately in the center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end partially opens the opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open at a different position in the area 5a so as to receive the game ball B, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 or the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in which it is possible to receive the game ball B in at least one of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B. , Are provided.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the bottom end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and in the lower part of the vertical center. A general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the lower left side of the gate portion 2003 and at a height slightly lower than the general winning port 2001 on the right side. The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 and slightly below the first starting opening 2002. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged at a position slightly lower to the left of the first special winning opening 2005.

  The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002, and a starting opening. The side unit 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has two general winning openings 2001, and the right end when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, with respect to the center in the up-down direction. A gate unit 2300 attached to the lower side and having a gate portion 2003, and a general winning opening 2001, a second start opening 2004, which are attached to the upper center of the game area 5a in the approximate center of the front view. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, and a transparent front production unit 2600 mounted so as to close the inside of the frame of the center winning 2500. And are equipped with.

  The gate unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is arranged at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a, and is arranged lower than the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 in which the game balls B are always allowed to pass in the vertical direction one by one, and a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged. The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. To be done.

  Further, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2511, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a after being distributed to the specific area by the distribution member described later, and then detected by the first count sensor 2512, and discharged by the distribution member. When it is distributed to the area, it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 without being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second count sensor 2513, and is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8a. Center goods]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 101 is a front view of a center accessory and a table production unit in the table unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and a lower movable effect unit 3100 and an upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. 3300 and the like can be seen from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. You can't break into.

  The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower right corner in the front view on the outer periphery of the frame, a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004, and the second big winning opening 2006 is arranged slightly below the first big winning opening 2005 to the left. Further, the center accessory 2500 is capable of releasing the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is openable and the game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B emitted from the warp outlet 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling in the lateral direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is displayed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed such that the position at the substantial center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest part in the center in the left-right direction is inclined toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from this part. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest part of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as the height of the second starting port 2004.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 (the top) is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a second starting opening sensor 2511 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004 and a first count for detecting the game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005. The sensor 2512, the specific area sensor 2512a for detecting the game ball B received by the first special winning opening 2005 and distributed to the specific area by the distribution member, and the game ball B received by the second special winning opening 2006 And a second count sensor 2513 for detecting (see FIG. 117). Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a starting opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is drawn by the passage of the game ball B in the gate section 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting. The first attacker solenoid 2515 for opening and closing the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the mouth 2004, and the first starting mouth 2002 or the second. (2) A second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the starting opening 2004, and the first big winning opening A distribution solenoid 2111 for operating a distribution member that distributes the game balls won in 2005 into a specific region and a discharge region is provided.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the upper surface and the upper part of the right side are the outer circumference (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a in a front view. In between, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the lower right corner of the front view has the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. The portion of the lower right corner when viewed from the front extends to the lower right corner of the game area 5a, and forms a space between the portion of the lower right corner and the portion of the upper portion of the right side surface. The gate unit 2300 is arranged in the space.

  Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B to the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 which are open (open) with a high probability.

[5-8b. Table production unit]
The table rendering unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105 and the like. FIG. 102 is a side cross-sectional view of the front effect unit along with the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the front effect unit and the reflective recesses of the front light guide plate. FIG. 104 is a front view showing a light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front production unit is made to emit light.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is a transparent flat plate-shaped front light guide plate 2610 that closes the inside of the center accessory 2500, a reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and an upper surface of the reflector 2620. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, and the center accessory so as to cover the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. And a front cover 2650 attached to the 2500.

  The front light guide plate 2610 of the front performance unit 2600 includes a light guide plate main body 2611 having a transparent flat plate shape, and one of a plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 formed on the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. A plurality of fine reflection concave portions 2613 that reflect the incident light forward. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are divided into four from a first specific light incident portion 2612a, a second specific light incident portion 2612b, a third specific light incident portion 2612c, and a fourth specific light incident portion 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light entering part 2612a, the second specific light entering part 2612b, the third specific light entering part 2612c, and the fourth specific light entering part 2612d are divided into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) on the upper surface of the light guide plate body 2611. Then, it is arranged in two turns in order from left to right (the order in which the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d returns to the beginning and becomes the first specific light incident portion 2612a).

  The reflection concave portion 2613 has a flat surface that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate body 2611. .. The reflection recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611. Further, the reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611.

  As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflection recess 2613 toward the front front surface of the light guide plate body 2611 (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflective recess 2613 is seen to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected by the reflection concave portion 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate body 2611, From the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, it appears that the reflective recess 2613 does not emit light.

  In the present embodiment, as the reflection concave portion 2613, a shape in which the reflection concave portion 2613 is recessed in a triangle and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 is shown. However, the shape is not limited to the above, and any shape may be used as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612.

  The plurality of reflection concave portions 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflection concave portions 2613a and the second specific light incident portion 2612b corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2612a. Corresponding to the plurality of second reflection concave portions 2613b, a plurality of third specific light incident portions 2612c corresponding to a plurality of third reflection concave portions 2613c, and a fourth specific light incident portion 2612d corresponding to a plurality of fourth reflection concave portions 2612d. And a concave portion 2613d.

  In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 capable of emitting light in different modes by reflecting light forward by a specific group of the reflective recesses 2613 among the plurality of reflective recesses 2613. There is. The plurality of patterns 2614 include a first pattern 2614a including only the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b including only the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b, and a third including only the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c. It is composed of a pattern 2614c and a fourth pattern 2614d composed of only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 and 104, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentrically arranged in order from the outer side to the center (after the fourth pattern 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

  The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. The front surface light guide plate 2610 of the reflector 2620 can be sandwiched between the front light guide plate 2610 by inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recessed portion 2621, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recessed portion 2621, a through hole 2622 penetrating vertically is formed in a portion corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640.

  The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 has a strip plate shape extending right and left, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on the lower surface of the reflector 2620 immediately above the fixed recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to the portions of the reflector 2620 corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622, respectively. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is formed so that a plurality of LEDs 2630 face downward through the through holes 2622 by being attached to the upper surface of the reflector 2620.

  The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 includes a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light entering section 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light entering section 2612b, and a third specific light entering section 2612c. And a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide a plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and from left to right. Are sequentially arranged in two rounds (the order of returning to the beginning after the fourth LED group 2630d to become the first LED group 2630a). In the present embodiment, each of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d has six LEDs 2630.

  Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the first specific light incident part 2612a into the light guide plate body 2611, and is reflected to the front by the first reflection recess 2613a, and the remaining first light is reflected. Since the second reflection concave portion 2613b, the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the first reflection concave portion 2613a appears to be visible to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The first pattern 2614a composed of the plurality of first reflective recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 104 (a)).

  When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the second specific light incident part 2612b into the light guide plate main body 2611, and is reflected to the front by the second reflection recess 2613b, and the rest of the light is emitted. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflection concave portion 2613b appears to be shining to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. The second pattern 2614b composed of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 104 (b)).

  When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate body 2611 from the third specific light incident portion 2612c, and is reflected to the front by the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the remaining light. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflection concave portion 2613c appears to be visible to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The third pattern 2614c composed of the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 104 (c)).

  When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate main body 2611 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d, and is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection recess 2613d, and the remaining light is emitted. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the third reflection concave portion 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d appears to be shining to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. The fourth pattern 2614d composed of the plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d can emit light (see FIG. 104 (d)).

  As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can each be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be replaced by the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630c. When the LED groups 2630d are made to emit light in this order, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d can be made to emit light in that order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. It is possible to perform a luminous effect such as animation.

  On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are made to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, and the second The pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a can be made to emit light in this order, and a light-emitting effect such as an animation can be performed in which the user concentrates from the outside toward the center.

  As described above, according to the front-face rendering unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be made to emit light by one front light guide plate 2610. It is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-back direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be located as close as possible to the player side, and a large space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured behind the front light guide plate 2610, a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, an upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, which makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance in the game area 5a and having a high appealing power to the player, and in addition to the effect by the luminous display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing the movable effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the front light guide plate 2610 causes a plurality of semitransparent patterns 2614 due to point emission of a plurality of reflective recesses 2613 to stand out in front of the effect unit, the ornament, and the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show a light-emitting decoration that moves like animation, it is possible to make a strong impact on the player who is familiar with the light-emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, and to surprise and entertain the player, It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, only the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the design 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 well, so that the player who is far from the front can see the design 2614. The light-emitting display becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and to prevent other players from paying attention. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to play the game without hesitation to other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched by the fixed recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are reliably positioned on the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thereby, each LED 2630 (the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, the fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected to the front front by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be surely emitted.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front-view game area 5a, even if the design 2614 is caused to emit light by the LED 2630, it emits light. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, and the game becomes difficult to see. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good state.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where two members are attached. It is possible to eliminate rattling between the LED and the front light guide plate 2610 and reliably position the plurality of LEDs 2630 at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably emitted to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 is obtained. It is possible to reliably perform light emission display.

  Furthermore, by arranging the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 only on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer circumference of the light guide plate body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in, the player can easily see the effect image and the like, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be entertained in a good state to suppress a decrease in interest, and a pachinko machine 1 having a feeling of openness can be provided because there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in a front view. It can be made attractive and appealing to the player by giving it a good internal appearance.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be obtained by aligning the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light, the front light guide plate is displayed. It is possible to make a strong impact on a player who thought that 2610 does not exist and to be surprised, and to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a from being deteriorated by seeing the reflector 2620 and the like. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LEDs 2630 can be made less visible. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to display light emission, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not predict, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and the player Can be made to think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the front light guide plate 2610 emits a plurality of different patterns 2614 to emit light, and the effect display device 1600 produces an effect image. Since it is possible to show the combined effect to the player, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and also to make the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by the effect of, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to add a sense of depth and a stereoscopic effect to the pattern 2614 that is being displayed by emitting light by displaying the effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2614 that are being displayed by emitting light on the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to show the player an effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the reflection recess 2613 has a triangular cross section and extends constantly, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross section has a semicircular arc shape and extends continuously. May have a polygonal shape and extend uniformly, or may have a curved cross section and extend uniformly.

  The LED 2630 may have a single color or a full color. Further, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light entering portions, the reflective recesses, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 116. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front center decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable effect unit, and FIG. 107 is a lower center lift base in the lower movable effect unit to raise the lower front central decorative body and FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board shown with the lower rear central decoration body illuminated, and FIG. 108 is a lower movable front and rear lower lift base, a lower left side lift base and a lower right side lift base are raised to lower the front. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the central ornament, the lower rear central ornament, the lower left side ornament, and the lower right side ornament are illuminated. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 108 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. In addition, FIG. 110 is a four-sided rotating decorative body, a left-side rotating decorative body, a left sub-side rotating decorative body, a right-side rotating decorative body, and a right sub-side rotating decorative body in the lower movable effect unit, which are respectively expanded to provide decoration portions on each surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of FIG. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram that schematically shows the types (sizes) of the arrows that are light-emitted and displayed in the lower movable effect unit.

  FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 113 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 114 is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decoration of the upper front movable effect unit.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A magnetic sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 117).

  The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped unit which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and whose front is open. The back unit includes a back box having a square opening on the rear wall where the effect display device 1600 faces forward, and a lower part inside the back box. The lower movable effect unit 3100 attached, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box, and the upper front attached in front of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box. And a movable effect unit 3300.

[5-9a. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part in the back box, and a part thereof is located in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front central decoration unit 3110 attached below the effect display device 1600 and near the front end of the back box, and a lower central effect unit arranged behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110. 3120, and a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170 that are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the lower central effect unit 3120.

  The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is provided with a lower front central decoration body 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (inverted isosceles triangle shape having flattened vertices) that is narrowed downward and having a light-transmitting property. The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The lower front central decoration body 3111 can be light-emitted and decorated by the lower central decoration substrate of the lower central effect unit 3120.

  The lower central effect unit 3120 is attached to the lower central elevating base 3121, which is attached to the rear box behind the lower front central ornamental unit 3110 so as to be able to ascend and descend, and the front face of the lower central elevating base 3121, so that the translucent The lower rear central decorative body 3122 and a lower central decorative substrate (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front (illustration is not shown). And a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central lifting base 3121.

  Although not shown, the lower central effect unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base for vertically guiding the lower central elevating base, and a unit. A rod-shaped arm member having a base end rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction, a sliding pin attached to a tip end of the arm member and inserted into a slit of a lower central elevating base 3121, and an arm member. And a lower central lifting drive motor for rotating.

  Although not shown, the lower central elevating base 3121 has a slit extending to the left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into this slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is driven by the lower center elevating drive motor between a lower position where the whole is behind the lower front central decorative body 3111 and an upper position where the whole is higher than the lower front central decorative body 3111. It is mounted so that it can be raised and lowered.

  The lower rear central decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The lower rear central decorative body 3122 can be light-embellished by the light emission of the LED of the lower central decorative substrate. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower central decoration board so that each of the light emitting regions 3122a of the lower rear central decoration body 3122 can be independently illuminated and decorated, and the lower central lifting base 3121 is raised. At times, it is mounted so that light can be emitted toward the lower front central decorative body 3111 which is the lower side and the front side.

  Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 has a plurality of mounting bases which are mounted on the upper end of the lower central lifting base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction and each of which extends upward in a flat plate shape. A plurality of central rotation drive motors, which are respectively mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with their rotary shafts facing in the left-right direction, and the rotary shafts of the respective central rotary drive motors, and the outer periphery of each central rotary drive motor. And a plurality of cube-shaped rotating ornaments 3126 that cover the. The plurality of rotary decorations 3126 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a central rotation drive motor, and are arranged coaxially in the left-right direction. Further, each of the rotating decorations 3126 has different decorative portions 3127 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). Each of the plurality of rotary decorations 3126 can be independently rotated by each central rotary drive motor.

  Although not shown, the central movable unit 3125 is mounted on the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121 below the rotary decorations 3126, and has a plurality of units capable of irradiating light to the rotary decorations 3126. A lower central upper surface decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately causing the LEDs on the lower central upper surface decorative substrate to emit light, each rotating decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like lower piece portion, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower central performance unit 3120 has a side portion and an upper side portion of a flat shape extending from the upper end of the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion to the right and shorter than the lower piece portion. When viewed from the left, the left unit base is mounted in the back box, and the cylindrical guide shaft is mounted with the lower end and upper end on the lower and upper pieces near the right side of the left unit base, respectively. And a rod-shaped male screw member in which a male screw is formed on the outer periphery of the left unit base, which is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and the upper piece so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft. And the male screw member A lower left side lifting base 3151 which has a fitted nut and is slidably mounted on a guide shaft; a lower left side lifting drive motor which is mounted on the left unit base and rotates a male screw member; A lower left side decorative body 3152 which is attached to the front surface of the left side lift base 3151 and has a light-transmitting property, and a right side surface of the lower left side decorative body 3152 can be irradiated with light to the left. A lower left side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3152a arranged in a row in the vertical direction. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate to emit light, each light emitting region The 3152a can be independently light-emittered.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower left slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side lift base 3151 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower left slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical sliding pin slidably inserted in the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending in the horizontal direction from the cage base end side.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a mounting base mounted on a slider and extending upward in a flat plate shape, and a rotation axis directed to the left and right directions on the mounting base. A left side rotary drive motor is attached, and a cube-shaped left side rotary decorative body 3153 is attached to the rotary shaft of the left side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left side rotary drive motor. The left side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). The left side rotary decoration 3153 is rotatable around a shaft extending left and right by a left side rotation drive motor.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotating decorative body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and light can be emitted toward the left side rotating decorative body 3153. A lower left side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately causing the LEDs on the lower left side upper surface decoration substrate to emit light, the left side rotating decoration body 3153 can be made to emit light.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the left unit base, and has a sub-mounting base extending upward in a flat plate shape and a sub-mounting base. A left subside rotation drive motor that is mounted with the rotation axis facing left and right, and a cubic left subside rotation that is attached to the rotation shaft of the left subside rotation drive motor and covers the outer circumference of the left subside rotation drive motor. And a decorative body 3155. The left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 has different decoration portions 3156 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). Further, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left sub-side rotation drive motor.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece part of the left unit base, and faces the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155. And a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. By appropriately causing the LEDs on the lower left sub-side upper surface decoration substrate to emit light, the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 can be made to emit light.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled to the game board 5, and the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 attached to the left unit base has a height at which the left side rotation decoration body 3153 can enter below. The lower center elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower center elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150, when the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is assembled to the game board 5, is located between the left side rotation decoration body 3126 and the leftmost rotation decoration body 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120. There is a space that can enter.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevating / lowering drive motor to move the left side rotating decorative body 3153 together with the slider via the lower left side elevating / lowering base 3151 and the lower central effector unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a descending position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the descending position and an ascending position having the same height as the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor to move the left side rotating decorative body 3153 via the slider to the appearance position adjacent to and adjacent to the lower central effect unit 3120. It can be slid in the left-right direction between a retracted position in which about half is located below the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 away from the lower central effect unit 3120.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like lower piece portion, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower central production unit 3120 has a side portion and an upper side portion extending from the upper end of the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion and extending to the left shorter than the lower piece portion. The right unit base mounted in the back box in the right side of the view, and the cylindrical guide shaft with the lower end and the upper end attached to the lower piece and the upper piece near the left side of the right unit base, respectively. And a rod-shaped male screw member in which a male screw is formed on the outer periphery of the right unit base, which is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and the upper piece so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft. And the male screw member A lower right side lift base 3171 which has a nut fitted therein and is slidably mounted on a guide shaft; a lower right side lift drive motor which is mounted on the right unit base and rotates a male screw member; A lower right side decorative body 3172 which is attached to the front surface of the right side lifting base 3171 and has a light-transmitting property, and a right side surface of the lower right side decorative body 3172, which is capable of emitting light to the right. A lower right side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3172a arranged in a row in the vertical direction. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate to emit light, Each of the 3172a can be independently light-emitting decorated.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider having a slit extending forward and backward, The lower right slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower right side lift base 3171 so that the rotating shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotating shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical sliding pin slidably inserted in the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending in the horizontal direction from the cage base end side.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to a slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape. A right side rotary drive motor that is attached and a cubic right side rotary ornament 3173 that is attached to the rotary shaft of the right side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right side rotary drive motor are provided. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). Further, the right side rotary ornament 3173 is rotatable by a right side rotary drive motor about an axis extending in the left and right directions.

  Although not shown in detail, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right side rotating decoration 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and light can be emitted toward the right side rotating decoration 3173. A lower right side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. The right side rotating decoration body 3173 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the lower right side upper surface decoration substrate to emit light.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the right unit base, and has a sub attachment base extending upward in a flat plate shape and a sub attachment base. A right subside rotary drive motor mounted with the rotary shaft facing left and right, and a cubic right subside rotary motor that is mounted on the rotary shaft of the right subside rotary drive motor and covers the outer circumference of the right subside rotary drive motor. And a decorative body 3175. The right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 has different decoration portions 3176 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). Further, the right sub-side rotary decoration body 3175 is rotatable by a right sub-side rotary drive motor about an axis extending to the left and right.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece part of the right unit base, and faces the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175. And a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs on the lower right sub-side upper surface decoration substrate to emit light.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 is a state in which the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175 attached to the right unit base in a state of being assembled to the game board 5 has a height at which the right side rotation decoration body 3173 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170, when the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 is assembled to the game board 5, between the rightmost rotating decoration body 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120, the right side rotating decoration body 3173. There is a space that can enter.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side elevating / lowering drive motor to move the right side rotating decorative body 3173 together with the slider via the lower right side elevating / lowering base 3171 and the lower central effector unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lower position, which is slightly higher than the height of the rotating ornament 3126 in the lower position, and an ascending position, which has the same height as the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175. In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor to move the right side rotating decorative body 3173 via the slider to the adjacent appearance position close to the lower central effect unit 3120. It can be slid in the left-right direction between the retracted position in which about half is located below the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 away from the lower central effect unit 3120.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a decorative portion 3127 of each of the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a decoration portion 3154 of the left side rotation decoration body 3153, a decoration portion 3156 of the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, and a right portion. Different decorations are formed on the decoration portion 3174 of the side rotation decoration body 3173 and the decoration portion 3176 of the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decorations 3153, the left subside rotating decorations 3155, the right side rotating decorations 3173, and the right subside rotating decorations 3175 are each formed in a cube of a dice shape and extend to the left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the rotation axis.

  In the state where the first surface of each of the four rotation decorations 3126, the left side rotation decoration 3153, the left subside rotation decoration 3155, the right side rotation decoration 3173, and the right subside rotation decoration 3175 faces the front, from the left. It has become "Lord," "One Eye," "One Eye," "Second Eye," "Three Eyes," "Four Eyes," "One Eye," and "Lord." Further, when the second surface of each is faced to the front, "star", "super", "chi", "cha", "n", "su", "!", "Star" are displayed from the left. Also, in the state where the third surface is faced to the front, "!", "Shin", "Ge", "Ki", "A", "Ts", "Shin", "!" Are displayed from the left. Furthermore, in the state where the fourth surface is facing the front, "celebration", "!", "O", "me", "de", "to", "uu", and "!!" are displayed from the left.

  In this way, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the left subside rotary ornament 3155, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right subside rotary ornament 3175 have the same numbered faces toward the front. Thus, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value that is a "big hit" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to appropriately emit light, "Arrows" having different sizes can be displayed by light emission. Specifically, if only the lower front central ornamental body 3111 is made to emit light, a triangular “small arrow” in which the apex of the isosceles triangle faces downward can be displayed (FIG. 106 and FIG. 111 (a)). reference). Further, when the lower front central decorative body 3111 and the raised lower rear central decorative body 3122 are caused to emit light, a downward-pointing "middle arrow" having a rod extending upward more than the "small arrow" is caused to emit light. (See FIG. 107 and FIG. 111 (b)). Further, in the state of the “middle arrow”, the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are raised, and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side. When all the side decorations 3172 are made to emit light, the "large arrow" in which the upper end of the downward arrow that is larger than the "middle arrow" spreads to the left and right can be displayed as light emission (FIGS. 108 and 111 (c)). See).

  In this way, it is possible to display three small arrows of different sizes, “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”. It is possible to cause a light emission display that the expected value of “” is high.

  Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In a normal state of the lower movable effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, in the lower central effect unit 3120, the lower central elevating base 3121 is behind the lower front central decorative unit 3110, and is in a descending position invisible from the front. The four rotating decorations 3126 attached to the upper ends of the lower central lifting bases 3121 are positioned so as to contact the upper ends of the lower front central decorations 3111 in a front view.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side elevating base 3151 is located slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 in a descending position almost invisible from the front, The left side rotating decorative body 3153 is separated from the lower central effect unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and about half is located at the retracted position below the left sub side rotating decorative body 3155, and the left sub side rotating decorative body 3155 is a game. It is located near the left end of the region 5a, which is lower than the center in the vertical direction.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side lift base 3171 is located slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front, and The right side rotating decorative body 3173 is separated from the lower central effect unit 3120 to the right through the slider, and about half is located at the retracted position below the right subside rotating decorative body 3175, and the right subside rotating decorative body 3175 is a game. It is located near the right end in the region 5a, which is lower than the center in the vertical direction.

  In this normal state, as one of the effects presented to the player, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the result of the lottery, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portion 3127 facing forward in each rotationally stopped rotating decorative body 3126. To make the player visually recognize. Accordingly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the movable effect by the four rotary decorations 3126 can be enjoyed. Then, when the combination of the respective decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 which have stopped rotating satisfies the predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central lift base 3121 by the lower central decorative board. To cause the lower front central decorative body 3111 of the lower front central decorative unit 3110 located in front to emit light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106, the downward arrow is emitted by the lower front central ornamental body 3111, so that the downward arrow emits light so that the player's line of sight is below the game area 5a. Can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in the, and can prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and easily participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. Therefore, it is possible to make the player entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Alternatively, from the normal state, depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lower central elevating base 3121 is set. Elevate from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the four rotating decorations 3126 move to the center of the front-view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and thus the game. Not only can the player be surprised, but the player can be made to think that something is good, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased. After that, after rotating the four rotating ornaments 3126, the rotation of each rotating ornament 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the ornament portions 3127 facing forward in each of the rotating ornaments 3126 that have stopped rotating is given to the player. Make it visible. As a result, when the four rotary decorations 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination, the player may think that the jackpot must be a "big hit" (a lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous) occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the lottery result by making the player feel pounding depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126 is stopped in a desired combination. Then, when the combination of the respective decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, a plurality of lower central decorative boards attached to the ascending lower central elevating base 3121 are provided. The LED is caused to emit light, and the lower rear central decorative body 3122 arranged in the front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are illuminated and decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 and the lower front central ornamental body 3111 cause a large downward arrow to be displayed in a luminescent manner. The player's line of sight can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed by the light emission display of the large arrow. It is possible to make the player think that it will be a “big hit” by operating, and to entertain the player participation type effect by causing the player to operate the effect operation unit 301.

  Furthermore, from the normal state, the lower central lifting base 3121 is selected in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Is raised from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the four rotating decorations 3126 move to the center of the front-view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and thus the game. Not only can the player be surprised, but the player can be made to think that something is good, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased. Then, the left and right left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173 are slid to the appearance positions on the center side, respectively, and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are respectively moved. Raise to the raised position (see FIG. 108). As a result, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game can be raised by making the user think that the lottery result is a "big hit". After that, after rotating the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, the rotation is stopped and left. Decorative portion 3156 of sub-side rotating decoration body 3155, decoration portion 3154 of left-side rotating decoration body 3153, decoration portion 3127 of each of four rotating decoration bodies 3126, decoration portion 3174 of right-side rotating decoration body 3173, and right sub-side rotating decoration. The player visually recognizes the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of ornamental portions 3127 include the ornamental portion 3127 having the numeral ornament, the countdown is stopped by stopping the rotation of the numeral ornamental portion 3127 so as to face forward. It is possible to make the player feel that the lottery result must be a "big hit" by the countdown effect, and enhance the interest in the game. Then, when the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left-side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 stop rotating and the countdown ends, The lower front central decoration 3111, the lower rear central decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are illuminated and decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, a larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is luminescently displayed, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the huge arrow. Thus, it is possible to convince that the lottery result is a “big hit”, and the player can surely operate the effect operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is lit and displayed, a message for explaining the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 109). As a result, since the rotation operation unit 302 rotates at high speed, the player's interest can be enhanced, so that the pressing operation unit 303 can be surely pressed, and the player's enjoyment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 109, the characters "The rotation of the lower button is hot!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the rotation operation unit 302 is focused on the player to perform the rotation operation. The faster the rotation speed of the section 302, the higher the expected value for a "big hit" is to be notified to the player. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and an effect image for notifying the expected value to the player is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 109, as the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. You may make it display the production | generation image which suggests the operating method of the production | operation production part 301 by which the operation of a player is prompted by the "arrow" light-emitted and displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decoration 3172, etc. Specifically, the effect images such as "press the button!", "Turn the dial!", "Turn the dial left!", "Turn the dial right!", Etc. are displayed. Thereby, the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be performed accurately, and the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 can be surely enjoyed.

  Then, the player may operate the effect operation unit 301 to display a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, and an expected value that is a “big hit” may be displayed by the effect image. An expected value is obtained by using four rotating ornaments 3126, left side rotating ornaments 3153, left subside rotating ornaments 3155, right side rotating ornaments 3173, and right subside rotating ornaments 3175 each formed in a dice shape. It may be displayed.

  As an expected value display using the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175, which are respectively formed in a dice shape. Performs an effect of displaying an expected value that is a "big hit" by combining the decorations 3127, the decorations 3154, the decorations 3156, the decorations 3174, and the decorations 3176 that face each other by rotating and stopping each. . Specifically, when using only the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 in the center, there are, for example, the following three patterns. In the pattern a1, the expected value is displayed in a state where the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front when the four rotary decorations 3126 have stopped rotating is a combination in which the meaning cannot be read by the player. No pattern. In the pattern a2, the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating with the second surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “H”, “H”, “N”, and “S”, and the expected value is high to some extent. The pattern displaying that. The pattern a3 has an extremely high expected value in a state where the respective rotation decorations 3126 stop rotating with the third surface facing the front and the combination of the decoration portions 3127 is “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu”. The pattern displaying that. In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of pattern a1, pattern a2, and pattern a3.

  Further, as effects using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotation decorations 3126, the left side rotation decorations 3153, the left subside rotation decorations 3155, the right side rotation decorations 3173, and the right subside rotation decorations 3175 ( Using eight (8) dice-shaped rotating bodies, a combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 makes it possible to display an expected value that is a “big hit”. You may do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combination of the decoration portion 3127, the decoration portion 3154, the decoration portion 3156, the decoration portion 3174, and the decoration portion 3176 whose rotation has stopped is different (the expected value is not displayed). In the pattern b2, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is “Shin” or “star”, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is “!” Or “Shin”, and the four center rotation decoration bodies 3126 are “H”, “C”, and “C”. “S”, the right side rotary ornament 3173 is “!” Or “Shin”, and the right sub side rotary ornament 3175 is “Shin” or “star” (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 is “Shin” or “star”, the left side rotating decoration body 3153 is “!” Or “Shin”, and the four center rotating decoration bodies 3126 are “G”, “Ki”, and “Ki”. "A" and "tsu", the right side rotary ornament 3173 is "!" Or "凰", and the right sub side rotary ornament 3175 is "command" or "star" (gekiatsu display). In the pattern b4, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is a “scale” or a “star”, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is “super”, and the four center rotation decoration bodies 3126 are “chi”, “ya”, “n”, and “su”. , The right side rotary ornament 3173 is “!”, And the right sub side rotary ornament 3175 is “combination” or “star” (super chance display). In the pattern b5, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is “sold” or “star”, the left side rotating decoration 3153 is “super”, and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “a”, and “tsu”. , The right side rotating ornament 3173 is “!”, And the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 is a combination of “凰” or “star” (super gekiatsu display). In the pattern b6, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “celebration”, the left-side rotating ornament 3153 is “!”, The four center rotating ornaments 3126 are “O”, “Me”, “De”, “To”, and the right side. The combination of the rotating decoration 3173 is "U" and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is "!!" ("big hit" is confirmed). In this way, the rotation is stopped by the eight rotating bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left subside rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right subside rotating decorative body 3175. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

  In the above production, if the player does not operate the production operation unit 301 within a certain time after the operation of the production operation unit 301 is prompted, the production of displaying the expected value as described above is not performed. , "Arrow" light emission display is also turned off. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, an effect is displayed in which the expected value as described above is displayed using the remaining effect time. When the effect time ends, the effect as described above ends, the light emission display of the "arrow" is turned off, and the effect ends.

  In this way, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a in the normal state (the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central decorative body 3111 rotate, or the lower central The four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged side by side by the elevating base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central ornamental body 3122, the four rotating ornaments 3126 elevated by the lower central elevating base 3121 rotate, and the lower left portion The pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and right side rotary ornaments 3173 slide in the left-right direction by the lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and the lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide mechanism). Or the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173 rotate, and the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament by the slide mechanism and the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171. 3173 are arranged in the left-right direction with the four rotating decorations 3126, the left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorations 3175, or the left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 rotate. Since it is possible to show the player such a movable effect, the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorations 3126), the left side rotating decoration 3153, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the left subside rotation are displayed. The decoration 3155, the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175, and the like can be paid attention to, and the movable effect by them can be enjoyed.

  Further, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 is caused to emit light and the lower front central ornamental body 3111 is caused to emit light to display a downward arrow, or the lower central elevating center is elevated. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light by the plurality of LEDs of the lower central decoration substrate, a large downward arrow is luminescently displayed, and a pair of lower left side elevations By elevating the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to cause the respective lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. It is possible to entertain the player also by the effect, and it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to the effect operation unit 301 below by the downward arrow that is light-emitted and displayed, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is performed for the player. Can be encouraged. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302, or the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, thereby participating in the player participation type effect. And can be entertained.

  Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation type effects as described above can be performed, by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects. , It is possible to make the player less tired and to make it difficult for the player to predict the effect pattern, so that it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected effect. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the lower front central ornamental body 3111, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122, the lower left side ornamental body 3152, the lower right side ornamental body 3172, etc. are caused to emit a downward arrow so that the player can see the downward arrow. When the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is urged, an effect image that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 301 on the effect display device 1600, an effect image that explains the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of the effect and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to easily operate the effect operation unit 301, entertain the player participation type effect, and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9b. Rear upper movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part in the back box above the effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the left base 3211 mounted in the back box and the left base 3211 slidably in an oblique direction from upper left to lower right. A left slider 3212, a linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, an upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with its rotation axis facing forward and backward, and an upper rear left. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and having a rotation shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 connected to the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250, A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the drive gear 3215 and is rotatably mounted on the left base 3211; and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3216 and is rotatably mounted on the left base 3211. A second transmission gear 3217 in the form of a spur gear, a third transmission gear 3218 meshed with the second transmission gear 3217 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211, a third transmission gear 3218 and a rack gear 3213, respectively. And a pinion gear 3219 in the form of a spur gear that is meshed with and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211.

  Further, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and extends in the left-right direction, and has a flat plate-shaped upper rear left decorative body 3220, and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear left decorative body 3220. An upper rear left decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decoration 3220 can be light-emitting decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear left decoration substrate to emit light.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 can drive the upper rear left drive motor 3214 to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 up and down via the rack gear 3213.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 mounted in the back box and the right base 3231 slidably in an oblique direction from upper right to lower left. A right slider 3232, a linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, an upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with its rotation axis facing forward and backward, and an upper rear right drive. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the motor 3234 and connected to the input side of the rotation shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 meshed with the gear 3235 and rotatably mounted on the right base 3231 and a first transmission gear 3236 meshed with the first transmission gear 3236 and rotatably mounted on the right base 3231. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237, a third transmission gear 3238 meshing with the second transmission gear 3237 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231, a third transmission gear 3238 and a rack gear 3233, respectively. And a pinion gear 3239 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the right base 3231.

  In addition, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and extends in the left-right direction, and has a flat plate-shaped upper rear right ornamental body 3240, and the rear side of the upper rear right ornamental body 3240 is attached to the front side. And an upper rear right decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be light-emitting decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear right decorative substrate to emit light.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 can drive the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 up and down via the rack gear 3233.

  The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical housing case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a that radially extend to the vicinity of the inner surface of the housing case 3251 inside the housing case 3251. An input member 3252 to which the rotary shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a inserted in the housing case 3251 with a protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252 having a circumferential gap. A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so as to be closer to the inner surface of the housing case 3251 as it gets closer to the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 protruding from the housing case 3251. An output member 3253 having an output shaft 3253c attached thereto, a plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the housing case 3251. A main body housing 3256 that has a tightening spring 3255 that is tightened from the outside, a housing case 3251 and a housing recess 3256a that houses the tightening spring 3255, and that is attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231, and the body housing. A cover member 3257 that closes the housing recessed portion 3256a of 3256 and through which the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 passes, and a bearing 3258 that is attached to the cover member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted are provided. (See FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c)).

  In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 rotates the input member 3252, the plurality of projecting portions 3252a of the input member 3252 come to the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. This causes the output member 3253 to rotate, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can directly transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves toward the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is caught between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is transmitted to the upper rear via the input member 3252. It is not transmitted to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force that moves the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward due to gravity acts, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 of the drive gear 3215 via the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward arbitrarily, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is loaded. Instead, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be kept stopped at arbitrary positions.

  In the clutch mechanism 3250 of the present embodiment, the housing case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by the tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side to the output member 3253 via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), The housing case 3251 rotates, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 contacts the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that is tightening the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 cannot be unlocked by being strongly bitten, and the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts the two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and at the same time, the two rollers 3254. May be biased toward the protrusions 3252a close to the lock springs 3260, respectively. As a result, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. It can be engaged with the inner surface, and the rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from when the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts until the lock is applied. It can be reduced as much as possible.

  Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is located above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300 as shown in FIG. 99 and the like. The upper right rear decoration 3240 is invisible to the player. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are in the non-driving state, respectively, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240. The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission.

  Accordingly, in order to prevent the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. It is not necessary to provide an electrical lock mechanism for preventing the above, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, since the existence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from arbitrarily moving, the game board 5 is being transported or attached to the island facility in the game hall. Even if vibrations or accelerations are applied at the time of, etc., the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the state of the origin at the time of shipment, and it is not necessary to perform unnecessary origin adjustment. It is possible to reduce the labor required for installing the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move diagonally downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 is moved. And the left end of the upper rear right decoration 3240 come into contact with each other to form one large decoration (see FIG. 112). As a result, a large decorative body that extends to the left and right appears on the upper front surface of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and entertain the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right). Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between each of the decorations 3240) and the decorative body 3240), vibrations from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, and the upper portion. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 moving downward due to gravity or the like acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the member 3253, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. Transmission of rotation from the left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is blocked, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from freely descending, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are unexpected through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the movement (falling) and to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from unintentionally moving to give a player a sense of distrust. Therefore, the player can enjoy the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

  Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the clutch mechanism 3250 can restrict the rotation of the output member 3253 and lock the output member 3253. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at a position of an arbitrary height via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that stop moving up and down at a position, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and a decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be made

  Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left The drive motor 3214 and the upper right rear drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being overloaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being damaged early due to overload, and at the same time, the upper portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of urging the protrusions 3252a side close to each other, when a force for rotating the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately pressed. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is activated after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. The rotation of the output member 3253 until this time can be reduced as much as possible. Accordingly, when the left rear slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can smoothly descend without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and entertains the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In addition, by moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 respectively downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and Since the large rear decorative body can be formed by combining the upper rear right decorative bodies 3240 with each other, a large decorative body can be combined to have a large impact on the player, and the player can enjoy themselves. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage will occur due to the appearance of a large ornament, and expectation for the game. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress a decrease in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other to be combined, the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by abutting each other. However, since each of them has the clutch mechanism 3250, the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (try to rotate from the output side). Force), the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving due to contact with each other. It is possible to prevent the body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning, and surely entertain the player with a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come into contact with each other to entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, since the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256, the output member is output from the output side. By rotating 3253, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 presses the roller 3254 against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 so that the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force to rotate the housing case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) to rotate the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. If it is larger than this, slippage occurs between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the housing case 3251 rotates. Then, as the housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that is tightening the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the torque is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 cannot be unlocked due to strong biting, and the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent the above-mentioned effects.

[5-9c. Front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box above the effect display device 1600 in a front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is a horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part in the back box, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be vertically movable. And an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by driving the upper front drive motor 3302.

  The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is a circular central decorative body 3351 attached to the center of the unit base 3301 so as to be able to move vertically (downward) and downward, and is arranged on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. A pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a that are connected to each other and are attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first projecting ornament 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second projecting ornaments 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central ornament 3351, and a pair of second projecting ornaments 3353a are connected to each other. And has a second connecting rod 3353b which is coaxially attached to the first connecting rod 3352b of the first projecting ornament 3352 and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the central ornament 3351 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second protruding decorative body 3353 is provided.

  The first protruding decorative body 3352 has a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape whose base is the central decorative body 3351 side. In the pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction than the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the left side. The first projecting decoration 3352 has a link mounting portion 3352c at the tip of the right first projecting decoration 3352a to which the tip of the right second link rod 3304 described later is rotatably mounted.

  The second protruding decorative body 3353 has a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a formed in an isosceles triangular shape with a long base protruding from the central decorative body 3351 side. In the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. In addition, the second protruding decoration 3353 has a link mounting portion 3353c to which a left end of a second link rod 3304 described later is rotatably mounted at the tip of the left second protruding decoration 3353a.

  In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 are formed in the same shape and the same size. There is. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a left second protruding decorative portion 3353a behind the left first protruding decorative portion 3352a and a right right first protruding decorative portion 3352a behind the right second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The first protruding decoration 3352 and the second protruding decoration 3353 are positioned so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  Although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 includes a plurality of LEDs on the front side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a. The upper front central decorative board, the first projecting decorative section decorative board, and the second projecting decorative section decorative board, the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first projecting decorative sections 3352a, and the pair of The second projecting decoration portions 3353a can be independently light-emitted and decorated.

  Further, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction at positions symmetrical with respect to the front-left center in the left-right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in the shape of a rod and a pair of first link rods 3303 are attached to the tips of the respective first link rods 3303 so that their base ends can rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and the tip ends project first. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative body 3353 so as to be rotatable around axes extending in the front-rear direction, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. An upper stopper 3305 which projects forward from the first link rod 3303 to restrict upward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303, and a lower stopper 3306 which restricts downward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303. ing.

  Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is raised, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 116 (a)). In this normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 overlap with each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize it as one decorative body. Further, in a normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stoppers 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. Then, the central decorative body 3351 moves together with the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, and the entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 moves downward. At this time, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 move downward while being horizontally extended. By moving the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 downward, the second link rod 3304 on the right side attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the left side The left side second link rod 3304 attached to the link attaching portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative portion 3353a moves downward, respectively, and a pair of second link rods 3304 attached to the tips thereof, respectively. The first link rods 3303 rotate such that the tip ends thereof move downward.

  Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 that rotate with the downward movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (the central decorative body 3351) contact the lower stoppers 3306, further rotation is prevented. This is the state (see FIG. 116 (b)). After the pair of first link rods 3303 abuts on the lower stoppers 3306, respectively, when the central decoration body 3351 further moves downward, the right side first protruding decoration portion 3352a and the left side second protruding decoration portion 3353a, Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b ( The first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the side opposite to the side on which the second link rod 3304 is attached respectively rotate around the center of the central decorative body 3351) in the direction of moving downward. This is the case (see FIG. 116 (c)). As a result, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a, which are arranged on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so that the scissors open, respectively. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be made large, and it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 are overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction to form one decorative body. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first projecting decorative portion 3352a and second projecting decorative portion 3353a are rotated and opened so that their tips are separated from each other. It is possible to surprise the player who has recognized it as one ornament, and to entertain the movement of the upper front movable ornament 3350.

  Further, by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, only by moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are moved to the central decorative body 3351. Since they can be rotated and opened with respect to each other in opposite directions, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU are provided. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. The mouth sensor 2511, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and the first big winning opening 2005 A first count sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B, a specific area sensor 2512a for detecting the game ball B received by the first special winning opening 2005 and distributed to a specific area by the distribution member, and a second special winning opening 2006 Detection signals from the second count sensor 2513 that detects the accepted game ball B, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O port, respectively. ..

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting opening solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid 2515. 2516, output a drive signal to the distribution solenoid 2111, or a main control I / O port from the status display of the function display unit 1400, a normal symbol display, a normal hold display, a first special symbol display, a first special The drive signal is output to the number-of-holds indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second number of special reserved indicators, the round indicator, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first count sensor 2512, the specific area sensor 2512a, and the second count sensor 2513 are of non-contact type. While an electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2511. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, and the game ball B is frequently entered. The detection of the game ball B by the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. Further, since the specific area sensor 2512a is also an important sensor (which directly affects the player's profit) involved in the occurrence of a big hit game, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  In addition, the main control MPU sends various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511, although the detailed description thereof will be given later.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM during the power-off process even when the power is shut off. This stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and a ball feed control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail at the time of maintenance. 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the game ball B in the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201), and a ball removal switch for starting the ball removal operation is provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) being input from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout are also input. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "the ball is out" (specifically, the ball is cut off). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the payout device 580 is informed that there is no game ball B), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number “3” is displayed, the fact that the “counting switch error” has occurred (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, it informs that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, the fact that "CR is not connected" (the electric connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, the fact that "is in stock" (specifically, the number of gaming balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls) is informed. .

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial system, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, which signal is the ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit which outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit which outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launching reference pulse and outputs it to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 which electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

  The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 117, the peripheral control board 1510 uses a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Sending the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation light-up signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame-side drive light emission data for a frame decoration drive board serial I / O port From the door frame 3 side, or control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the display control unit serial I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512. , And outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral control MPUs. Has been entered in. Further, the detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 outputs the signal based on the operation signal. Watching for activity.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side speaker provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. Signal, 2.1 ch surround signal, or 4.1 ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the production drive board of the game board 5 are serial input different from the display command. The output port is used, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The production drive board outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

  In addition, the production drive board sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, each drive motor provided on the game board 5, and the like. Or output to.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512, a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviated to Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

  This display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives the execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

  The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the top screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

  The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, houses, mountains, roads, and the like that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

  It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats the main scan for sequentially setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and the main scan in the direction intersecting the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to allow the player to rotate the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously recorded in one minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nails. , The flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails while centering. The area on the left side of the accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the part is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that it is received in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 and obstacle nails bring the game ball B toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, Alternatively, there is a possibility of being accepted in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B struck in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 which is the highest (so-called, right hit). , Is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this portion is provided with a second starting opening 2004 and a general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the result of the drawn ordinary lottery is "normal win", the second start opening which is closed. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 15 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B from the dispensing device 580 are transferred to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.08 to 20 seconds, which is also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

  It should be noted that if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is finished. Further, the number of holding of the ordinary lottery result is limited to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, on the main control board 1310). A lottery of special lottery results for generating "small hit" and "time reduction (time reduction) win" is performed, and the lottery is performed by accepting the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. If you win the big hit in the special lottery result, determine the big hit type based on the symbol random number (hereinafter also referred to as the symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)) that is acquired at the time of entering the ball, A game privilege (a big hit game or a game state after the big hit game) corresponding to the judged big hit (a big hit type determined) is given. Similarly, the first start opening 2002 and the second When the small hit is won in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the starting opening 2004, the symbol random number (hereinafter, the symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol, which is acquired at the time of entering the ball) It also determines the small hit type based on (also referred to as a pattern random number), and enters the special area in the game privilege (small hit game or small hit game) corresponding to the small hit of the judged type (decided small hit type) The big hit game to be executed in the case of playing, the game state after the big hit game) is given. And the special lottery result of the lottery is given for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, special fluctuation). It is also suggested to the player over time. Note that the jackpot type that is selected by the game ball B being received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is “14R hour short jackpot (14R hour short jackpot) A, 14R hour short big hit B) "," 5R hour short big hit A (5R hour short big hit A, 5R hour short big hit B) ", etc., and the small hit type is" 5R small hit (no V hit) (5R small hit A1 5R small hit B1) ", 5R small hit (V hour short hit big) (5R small hit A2, 5R small hit B2)", 14R small hit (V hour short hit big) (14R small hit A, 14R small hit B) Also, as will be described later in detail, for "5R small hit A2, B2" and "14R small hit A, B", there is a small hit that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the specific area. It is set, and for "5R small hit A1, B1", compared to "5R small hit A2, B2" and "14R small hit A, B", it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area. The hit is set.

  The special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 while the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are received. A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 can accept the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to receive the game ball B, many The game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small win", the first special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 1.8 seconds). The opening / closing pattern for closing from is executed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit" or when the game ball that has won the first big prize hole 2005 in the small hit game enters a specific area, the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize A predetermined long time (28.5 seconds in this example) elapses after the mouth 2006 is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, or to the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. Accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B, and if any of the conditions are satisfied, an opening and closing pattern that puts the game balls B in an unacceptable closed state (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, if "14R jackpot" is 14 rounds, and so on, the player can win a prize so that an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (big hit game) Generate.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are provided before the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is suggested. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted, the start of suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is limited to four with respect to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, respectively. For more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are provided. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. When the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is suggested, this suggested special lottery result must be "big hit" and "small hit". In this case, the starting condition for the lottery of the next special lottery result will be satisfied, and if there is a special lottery result that is held in an unexecuted state on the main control board 1310, the special lottery result with the highest exhaustive ranking Will be digested (executed) from.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result (variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol)) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, it is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. In the suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the LEDs that are lit. For example, if the special lottery result is "big hit", the LEDs are turned on in combination according to the big hit type (big hit pattern), and if the special lottery result is "small hit", the LEDs are turned on in combination according to the small hit type. Then (small hit pattern), if the special lottery result is “miss”, the special lottery result is suggested by turning on the LED in a combination different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (miss symbol).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variably manner after changing each picture string in a state where three picture rows (decorative patterns) each consisting of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. The displayed image rows (decorative patterns) are sequentially stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, each of the symbol rows fluctuates in a state in which three symbol rows each including a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. After that, the variable-displayed symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed. At this time, each of the three design columns that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that each of the decorative symbols is a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result occurs.

  Further, in the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the left column → the right column → the middle column when viewed from the player side, and the specific two columns (two left and right in this embodiment) are displayed. If the same decorative pattern is preceded by (row) and is temporarily stopped and displayed, a reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, the left row of the plurality of symbol rows is the first stop row, the right row is the second stop row, the middle row is the third stop row, and the left row and the right row are the reach forming rows that form the reach state. Becomes

  Here, the "temporary stop display" is something that can appear during a period in which the special symbol in the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is maintained in a changing state, In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuation state. On the other hand, the "confirmed stop display" means that when the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, or it can appear after that, In the display area of the effect display device 1600, all the decorative symbols are in a state of being stopped without fluctuating.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time. Further, when the time (variation time) indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 has elapsed, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 described later. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) does not completely stop the production indicating the special lottery result on the production display device 1600 until it receives a stop display command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) (for example, (Vibration fluctuation display), the effect suggesting the special lottery result is stopped (fixed display) based on the reception of the stop display command.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 and the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the back unit 3000, the upper rear part. By appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various kinds of effects, and the player's game It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the selected special lottery result. 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be appropriately used to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  As described above, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop at the big hit symbol, the big hit game in which the player can win the prize is performed on the main control board 1310. In executing the big hit game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the big hit game is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are set up to a prescribed round number (14 rounds in this embodiment) that is predetermined according to the decided jackpot type. Is opened (the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are set in a state in which the game ball B can be accepted), and a round game is played. One round game is until the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once), and the first big winning is made during one round game. Until a specified number (upper limit number of prizes: 10 balls in this example) of game balls B is won in the mouth 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, or a specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) ) Is passed until it is released. In the round game, a round effect is performed. Then, when the round game of the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending period (about 5 seconds in this embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game is performed is generated, and when the ending period is finished, the big hit game is finished. It

  Further, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped at the small hit symbol, a small hit game in which a player can win a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. In executing the small hit game, first, an opening period is generated in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hit game is performed. Then, when this opening period ends, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened (the first special winning opening 2005 is set in a state in which the game ball B can be accepted). In the embodiment, it is performed once). During a single open game, until the specified number (upper limit number of prizes: 10 balls in this example) of game balls B are won in the first big winning opening 2005, or a specified time (open game time: in this example). It will be released until (1.8 seconds) has elapsed. In the opening game, an opening effect is performed. Then, when the opening game of the specified number of times of opening is finished, an ending period (about 5 seconds in this embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hit game is performed is generated, and when the ending period is ended, the small hit game is Will be terminated.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the big hit game is continuously generated after the end of the small hit game. Although not shown, the first big winning opening 2005 is provided with a allocating member for allocating the game balls won at the first big winning opening 2005 into a specific area and a discharge area, and when a small hit game is started, a distribution solenoid is provided. 2111 operates in a predetermined operation mode. Then, in the small hit game, the game ball B wins the first big winning opening 2005, and the winning game ball B is distributed to the internal specific area by the distribution member and detected by the specific area sensor 2512a. The round game in which the second special winning opening 2006 is opened is performed with the upper limit of the specified round number (15 rounds in this embodiment) predetermined according to the determined small hit type. Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the small hit game described above, not only the end of the small hit game is shown, but the game ball B sorted by the sorting member is the specific area inside the first big winning opening 2005. It also indicates whether or not it is detected by the sensor 2512a, that is, whether or not the small hit game is continuously played as the big hit game. When the big hit game is continuously generated after the small hit game is finished, the small hit game in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened is one round, and a number of round games including this one round Until the number of specified rounds is reached (from the second round to the fifteenth round), the round game in which the second special winning opening 2006 is opened is played.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a part of the case where it is a big hit symbol, and after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled in a time saving state. Further, in a part of the case where the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a small hit symbol, the game ball B sorted by the sorting member during the small hit symbol is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a. After the big hit game executed based on the fact, it is controlled to a time saving state. In this time saving state, compared with a non-time saving state in which the time saving state does not occur (normal game state, etc.), the result of the ordinary determination as to whether or not the game ball B is easily won in the second starting opening 2004 is derived. In addition to shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation, the second starting opening 2004 is designed to open and close in an opening pattern different from the non-time saving state when winning in the normal drawing in the normal determination (time saving control). .

  In the present embodiment, in the case of winning the universal figure in the non-time saving state, the opening pattern A in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed in the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is performed, while the time saving is performed. In the case of winning the common figure in the state, the opening pattern B in which the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is performed. That is, the second starting opening 2004 is set to operate advantageously in the player in the time saving state as compared with the non-time saving state, in which the opening / closing time corresponding to one universal figure is long. Therefore, in the time saving state, compared to the case of the non-time saving state, the second starting opening 2004 is in a state where the ball entry rate is easier to open and close. The sphere B is accepted and the normal symbol variation according to the normal determination is easily performed. In addition, the judgment of whether or not it is a time saving state is made on the basis of when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, specifically, when the normal symbol fluctuation is stopped. If it is a time saving state, the opening pattern A that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is executed even if it is a time saving state at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation, and the normal symbol In the case of a time saving state when the fluctuation stops, there is an opening pattern B that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 in a long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) even if it is a non-time saving state at the start of the symbol fluctuation. Executed.

  According to the above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, if the player continues to right-handed when he / she wins the universal figure in the time saving state, the game ball B may be accepted by the second starting opening 2004. There is a high probability that the game ball B will be received in the second starting opening 2004. On the other hand, if the winning game is won in the non-time saving state, it is difficult to receive the game ball B in the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 is mainly executed, and in the time saving state, the game ball B mainly into the second starting opening 2004. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the acceptance is executed.

  Further, in the time saving state according to this embodiment, the total of the symbol fluctuation of the first special symbol and the symbol fluctuation of the second special symbol is predetermined after the jackpot game executed when the 14R hour / hour jackpot is won. Number of times (100 times in this example: number of times saved) Time saving state A that ends when executed, and 5R time saving after completion of jackpot game executed when you win the jackpot (In this example, 5 times: reduced number of times) There is a shortened state B, which is executed when the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, reduced number of times: 1). Also, after the big hit game executed when the 5R small hit (V hour short big hit) is finished, it is controlled to the time saving state B, and the big hit game executed when the 14R small hit (V hour short big hit) is won After the end, the time saving state A is controlled.

  Thus, in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 is mainly executed, and in the time saving state, the game ball B mainly to the second starting opening 2004. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the acceptance of is executed. In addition, in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving big hit is selected from the time saving state, the number of times of symbol fluctuation (time saving number) that can be executed during the time saving state B is set to 5 times in the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, it is set to once, and the number of times (time saving number) is different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second special symbol based on the starting winning award to the second starting opening 2004 is more than the case where the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning award to the first starting opening 2002 is executed. When the variable display is executed, it is brought into an advantageous state for the player. In addition, in the time saving state B executed when the player wins the 5R time reduction jackpot out of the time saving state, the variation time of 7 seconds when the variation display of the first special symbol that the first special lottery result is lost is performed. (Except for hold shortening control (excluding control to set a fluctuation time shorter than normal (7 seconds) when the number of holds is 3 or more)), the second special lottery result will be lost When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed, the variation time is 16 seconds (the second special symbol does not carry out the hold shortening control in the time saving state B which is executed when the 5R hour / hour jackpot is won in the time saving state) Is set to.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when both the first holding number based on the starting winning a prize for the first starting opening 2002 and the second holding number based on the starting winning for the second starting opening 2004 are present, The variable display of the second special symbol according to the second hold number is prioritized and executed (the second hold number is preferentially consumed over the first hold number). As described above, if the right-handed player is continuously hit in the case where he / she wins the universal game in the time saving state, it is highly probable that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting opening 2004. The time saving state B executed when the big hit is won is that the start winning is generated in the second starting opening 2004 in most cases, and the variable display of the second special symbol based on this starting winning is executed. finish.

  Next, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. Eight kinds of numbers [1] to [8] are adopted as the decorative design corresponding to the first special design displayed on the effect display device 1600 of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, and as the big hit design, [ 111] [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888] are adopted. Moreover, 2/270 is defined as the winning probability of the big hit on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side. The winning probability of the small hit on the first special symbol side is 3/270, and the winning probability of the small hit on the second special symbol side is 113/270, respectively. As a winning probability per ordinary figure, 251/251 is specified. Further, as the number of prize balls of the game ball B, three for the first starting opening 2002, one for the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. On the other hand, 15 are specified respectively. In addition, as the opening pattern A of the second starting port 2004, a mode is defined in which the second starting port 2004 is maintained in that state until 0.05 seconds has elapsed after the opening state. On the other hand, as the opening pattern B of the second starting port 2004, a mode is defined in which the second starting port 2004 is maintained in that state until 1.5 seconds have elapsed after the opening state. In addition, “1 ball” is defined as the winning upper limit number which is a condition for closing the second starting opening 2004. Further, in each round game of the big hit game, "1" is set as the number of times of opening the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, and "10 balls" is set as the upper limit number of winning. Further, in the small hit game, "1 time" is defined as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and "10 balls" is defined as the maximum winning number.

  By the way, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, as a big hit game, the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006 will be in an open state. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 while the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control A predetermined number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 by the board 633. Therefore, when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 allows the game ball B to be received, so that many game balls B are transferred. It can be paid out and entertain the player.

  On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a small hit symbol, as a small hit game, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. Then, when the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in an open state, a predetermined number of game balls B are delivered from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout controlling board 633. , Is dispensed to the upper plate 201. However, in the small hit game, the opening time of the first big prize hole 2005 is short, and the first big prize is larger than the number of the game balls B accepted in the first big prize hole 2005 and the second big prize hole 2006 in the big hit game. Much less is accepted by mouth 2005. As described above, in the small hit game, the number of the game balls B paid out to the player is small, but the game balls B distributed to the first special winning opening 2005 during the small hit game and distributed by the distribution member are A big hit game can be generated by being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, and the player can be entertained.

  In this embodiment, the winning probability of the big hit on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is set to 2/270, and when the big hit is won on the first special symbol side, Since most of them (94%) are configured to be 5R hourly big hits, the big hit (so-called first hit) on the first special symbol side in the normal game progress process (non-time saving state) is 5R hourly big hits. There is a high possibility that a big hit will occur, and after the end of the big hit game relating to the 5R time-shortening big hit, the aforementioned time-saving state B will occur. When the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed in the case of being controlled to the time saving state B after the end of the big hit game, a plurality of them are displayed in the second starting opening 2004 during the variable display. Increase the second hold number that is likely to lead to the execution of the small hit game by inserting the individual game balls B, and after the change display, the variable display according to the second hold number is executed and the small hit game is executed. The game company will have high expectations. In other words, if any of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable state when the time saving state B is controlled after the end of the big hit game, using the variable display time, first the small A stock game that increases (stores) a second holding number that is likely to be linked to the right to execute a winning game is executed, and the second holding number that has been (stored) increased during the stock game is digested after the fluctuation display and the small hitting game is played. It is possible to realize a new game property of executing a digestive game aiming to acquire the execution right of, and to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game in comparison to the conventional game property of simply waiting for the next big hit, with regard to the continuous occurrence of big hits. Is possible.

  Further, in order to more appropriately realize the above-mentioned game property, in the present embodiment, the progress control in the time saving state is controlled in a peculiar form. Specifically, in the time saving state B, which is executed when the 5R time saving big hit is won in the time saving state, when the starting winning prize is generated in the second starting opening 2004 and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In, the time saving state B will be ended after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed only once, but since the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variable time of 16 seconds, in the meantime A plurality of starting winnings to the second starting opening 2004 occur, and after the time saving state B ends, the variable display based on the plurality of starting winnings is executed. That is, the variable display period of the second special symbol, which is executed based on the occurrence of the starting winning prize in the second starting opening 2004, in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won in the time saving state, , The second starting opening 2004 is set to be long enough to be opened and closed a plurality of times, and as a result, a plurality of starting winnings for the second starting opening 2004 are generated (the second hold number is increased). Has become. Thereby, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B, before and after the end of the time saving state B, the above-mentioned "storing the number of second special symbols reserved and digesting" It is possible to realize "playable game characteristics", and to prevent a decline in the entertainment appeal.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second hold number is zero (the second hold number is not stored) in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving big hit is won in the time saving state. In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the occurrence of a new starting winning number to the first holding number or the first starting opening 2002, in the variable display of the first special symbol once. Without ending the time saving state B, it is supposed to continue the time saving state B even after the variable display of the first special symbol once, and in the time saving state B in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed. After the variable display of the special symbol is executed up to 5 times, the time saving state B is ended. As a result, the first, which is more disadvantageous than the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed because there is no second holding number in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving big hit is won in the time saving state Fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed only once, compared to the case of ending the time saving state B after the variable display of the second special symbol is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the second special symbol is the first special symbol). Even though it is easier to win the small hit, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the player cannot receive the right for one lottery of this second special symbol, and such a disadvantage occurs. It is possible to prevent a decline in the enjoyment of games.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed up to 5 times in the time saving state B, and then the time saving state B is ended. Therefore, after the start of the time saving state B, the time saving state B continues even if all the four reserved numbers of the first special symbols that have already been stored are exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to experience the above-mentioned game characteristics even if the player leaves the seat after the time saving state B is started, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by leaving the seat.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed once, even if the variable display of the first special symbol has not reached 5 times, the variation of the second special symbol at that time is once. The time saving state B is configured to end with the display. That is, the one-time symbol fluctuation of the second special symbol in the time saving state B will also function as a limiting means for forcibly ending the time saving state B that may occur over a plurality of fluctuation displays on the first special symbol side. However, it is possible to prevent the time saving state B from being unduly lengthened and to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous, so that it is possible to more preferably realize the above-mentioned game property.

  In addition, in the time saving state B executed when winning the 5R time saving big hit among the time saving state, the condition (time saving number) for ending the time saving state B is not limited to the above, but at least the second special symbol. It may be configured to be able to execute the variable display of, for example, two times as the time reduction number of the first special symbol, may be once as the time reduction number of the second special symbol, or as the time reduction number of the first special symbol. It may be 5 times, and may be 2 times as the number of times the second special symbol is changed. As described above, as a limiting means for forcibly ending the time-saving state that can occur over one or more variable symbols on the variable display side, when the variable display of the other special symbol functions, the other one It is preferable to keep the number of times the special symbol fluctuates once.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as a time saving state B, when the symbol variation of the first special symbol is executed five times after the end of the big hit game, or when the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed once. Although configured to finish, in addition, programming is performed to end the time saving state B by executing the total number of variations of the symbol variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 times after the jackpot game is over. It may be set in advance. For example, when adding the total number of fluctuations, when determining the end of the time saving state B, the total number of fluctuations is referred to after the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol alone and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol alone. It is possible to exemplify such a configuration. By configuring in this way, the change of programming from other gaming machines, which does not differ in the timing of ending the time saving state in the first and second special symbols, or the timing of ending the time saving state in the first and second special symbols While changing the programming to other game machines that do not differ, while deleting the program data related to the total number of fluctuations, and making it possible to achieve commonization without making significant changes such as additions, the symbol of the second special symbol It is possible to realize the above-described game property in which the time saving state ends when the variation is executed once.

[8. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first performs various types of processing as step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Initializes the data stored in the RAM built in the register or the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as the main control built-in RAM). The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process. Also, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, a random number, which is the number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol Variable random number used for lottery processing for a predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for variable display control, whether or not to reach as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol Reach random number used for lottery processing (whether or not to execute the effect), symbol random number used for lottery processing for determining the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (1st symbol random number, 2nd symbol random number), a random number counter that holds random numbers such as random numbers used in the lottery process for winning or losing the second trigger opening 2004 (ordinary random number), etc. I have it.

  In addition, in this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first winning opening 2002 is started, the second winning opening 2004 is won. Even when the reach random number is updated, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter. You may make it different, and the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, and the second special symbol, which is different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

  In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only random numbers (fluctuating random numbers) among these random numbers that are not related to winning or losing are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS, for example.

  FIG. 118 (b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2301, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, the second count sensor 2513, the general winning opening sensor 3001, Detection signals from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 and the specific area sensor 2512a are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (special random number, ordinary random number) is updated, and the counter of the random number counter is updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the second special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning or losing the second trigger opening 2004. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

  Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then changes to the special symbol process process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like in the normal symbol process process is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer as the process of step S18.

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S19, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, the second count sensor 2513. When the detection signals of the general winning a prize sensor 3001 and the like are in the ON state, the prize ball processing for outputting the payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that the prize balls corresponding to the signals are paid out to the player. To do. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 and pays out the prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball B is won in the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port sensor 3002 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball B is won in the second starting port 2004, and the first ball is won. (2) When the starting opening sensor 2511 is turned on, "1 ball", when the game ball B wins the first winning hole 2005 and the first count sensor 2512 is turned on, "15 balls", the second winning prize When the game ball B wins the mouth 2006 and the second count sensor 2513 turns on, “15 balls”, the game ball B wins the general winning opening 2001 and the general winning hole sensor 3001 turns on. The prize balls of "8 balls" are paid out to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of pending storages as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the content of the register is restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is terminated. Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 119, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3002. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, and this is included in the main control. The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2511 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. The second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit executing flag is set, the big hit game is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S40) is performed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the contents of the jackpot type) about the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped suggests "15R jackpot". The first count sensor 2512 indicates that after the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or ten game balls B have been won in the first big winning opening 2005. The process of controlling the 15R jackpot game is repeated by repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed 15 times when detected.

  In the big hit control process, after the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 as described above, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag that indicates that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the jackpot game based on the jackpot that controls the time saving after the jackpot game is finished, and will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in 130 or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time saving is set so as to end the time saving control when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. That is, start the time saving control after the big hit game, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, the condition is satisfied. The time saving control is ended.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit is made. If the in-execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small-hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests a “small-hit”, the second special winning opening 2006 will be described later. After opening the second big winning opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B or when it is detected by the second count sensor 2513 that 10 game balls B have been won in the second big winning opening 2006. Execute the process of closing. In addition, when the game ball B which is won in the second special winning opening 2006 and is distributed by the distributing member enters a specific area, the big winning game is controlled to open the first large winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, After 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game is repeated 15 times, and the game shifts to the 15R big hit game. Control. On the other hand, when the game ball B that has won the first big winning opening 2005 and is sorted by the sorting member does not enter the specific area, and enters the discharge area, it is not controlled by the big hit game and is small. After the winning game is finished, the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) before the small hitting game is controlled again.

  Further, the main control MPU is a second special reserved number counter that indicates the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area if neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the two special symbol reserved storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39).

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002, the same is shown in FIG. 120. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first number of reserved storages is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the first number of reserved memories is not the maximum value, the following step S43 to make the variable display control of the first special symbol a newly reserved state. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S41. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the production pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is started (step S45), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the first reserve memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, the two LEDs of the first special reserve number indicator in the function display unit 1400 are first reserved. In addition to updating so as to correspond to the number of storages, in the storage processing (step S20), a command for designating the first number of reserved storages (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. Type of game effect), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special reserved number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding thereto is set (step S62).

  Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memory, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit, it is executed by the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the reach effect is executed as the game effect, or prior determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is started before the variable display according to the start winning is started. Will be able to grasp.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

  Further, the first reserved storage area has a storage area of 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the pre-judgment command is received, the pre-judgment information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area Stored in advance, when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation display start of the first special symbol is received, the first variation pattern command is received and stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in advance. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). Thereby, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

  In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), This can be preceded by, for example, notification at a predetermined timing such as a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 2511 is in the ON state and the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004, the result is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved memory number reaches its maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is not the maximum value thereof, the following step S53 to make the variable display control of the second special symbol newly suspended. The processing of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of second reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  Also, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second holding state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is second held. In addition to updating so as to correspond to the number of storages, a command for instructing the second number of reserved storages (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and the random numbers used for the determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, on condition that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), depending on the first special symbol process flag, one of the following five process processing It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. The first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and the first special symbol is selected based on the read first special random symbol for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81). )
3. A variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and a variation of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process or the like for the aspect is performed
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83)
5. The variation control stop mode of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. To stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol stop process (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 124, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number) is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become.

  Then, after that, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the winning of the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. 126 (A) (first special random number read in step S102 when the first special symbol normal process is executed, When the two special symbol normal process is being executed, it is compared with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 126 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of different first special random numbers, which are different from the big hit determination value, match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won. Each of the first special random numbers matches the big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has been won for the small hit, and the first special random number of 265 kinds matches the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. Associated (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 3/270). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, there are two types of second special random numbers. 113 kinds of second special random numbers that are different from the big hit judgment value, which coincides with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit has been won. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 113/270). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit compared to the determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. This is more advantageous for the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process) As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is ended.

  The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the game state is at the time saving state, and a non-time saving used when the game state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table in the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination values are such that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach and 71 types of reach random number match the reach determination value indicating not to reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach random number reaches, The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that there is reach loss (step S120) as a result of the comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read out at step S102 (step S119) (step S120), the fluctuation occurs. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set and the process is terminated (step S121).

  127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 127, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 126B, and the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected big hit symbol determination table, the big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 126 (B), the jackpot symbol determination table is associated with each of the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) according to the determination result (14R hour / hour jackpot, 5R hour / hour jackpot). Remembered The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. It is closed after opening the first big prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big prize hole 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is able to enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a 14R big hit game, and after the big hit game, the symbol variation of the special symbol is changed. If the next big hit game does not occur until it is executed 100 times, the state is terminated and the time saving state A is controlled to 14R.
2. It is closed after opening the first big prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big prize hole 2005. (1 round), after that the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B have been won at the second big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when detected in 2513 four times (4 rounds), the game ball B can enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) in a 5R big hit game. Controlling, after the big hit game ends, the next big hit game must occur until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. End state 5R time reduction jackpot A controlling the time reduction state B that
3. It is closed after opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor 2513 detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the second special winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B can be entered into the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) by controlling the 14R big hit game, and after the big hit game, the symbol variation of the special symbol If the next big hit game does not occur until it is executed 100 times, the state is terminated and the time saving state A is controlled to 14R.
4. It is closed after opening the first big prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big prize hole 2005. (1 round), after that the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B have been won at the second big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when detected in 2513 four times (4 rounds), the game ball B can enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) in a 5R big hit game. Controlling, after the big hit game ends, the next big hit game must occur until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. End state 5R time reduction jackpot B controlling the time reduction state B that

  In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 6 judgment values are distributed when the 14R hour / hour jackpot is A, and 94 determination values are distributed when the 5R hour / short jackpot is A. There is. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 6% probability of being a 14R hour-short jackpot A, and a 94% probability of being a 5R hour-short jackpot A. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the 14R hour short-term big hit B is obtained, and 42 determination values are distributed when the 5R hour short-time big hit B is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 58% probability of being a 14R hour-short jackpot B and a 42% probability of being a 5R hour-short jackpot B. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared to the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the probability of being determined to be 14R hour short jackpot is high. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002, It is in an advantageous state for the player.

  In addition, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, a game state after the big hit game is finished is determined according to the kind of the big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after controlling the big hit game, a process of setting a time saving flag based on the determination result and a process of setting a time saving number according to the type of the big hit in the time saving number counter Executed.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the big hits of "14R hour / hour jackpot A" and "14R hour / hour jackpot B" are obtained, after the jackpot game for 14 rounds is executed, a special symbol (first special symbol) And (2nd special symbol) symbol fluctuation is controlled in a time-saving state until it is executed 100 times, and when it is determined that a big hit of "5R time-short big hit A" and "5R time-short big hit B" is obtained. After the jackpot game for 5 rounds is executed, until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 5 times, or until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, it is controlled in a time saving state. In this way, when a lottery result to be a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, it is always controlled to be in a short time state after the jackpot game, and similarly a lottery result to be a big hit by a lottery based on the second special random number. Even when the game is obtained, it is controlled to be in a time saving state after the jackpot game is over. However, when the big hits of "14R hour short and big hit A" and "14R hour short and big hit B" are obtained, the big hit game is better than when "5R time short big hit A" and "5R time short big hit B" are big hit. After execution, it is controlled to be in a time saving state for a long period of time.

  In addition, when it is determined to be 14R hour short and big hit A, it is decided as the 14R hour short and big hit A symbol as the 14R big hit symbol of the first special symbol, and when it is decided to be 5R time and short jackpot A, the first special symbol 5R big hit symbol is 5R. Decide on a short-time jackpot A pattern. In addition, when it is determined to be the 14R time-short and big hit B in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 14R time-short and big-hit B symbol is decided as the 14R big-hit symbol of the second special symbol, and when the 5R time-short and big hit B is decided. (2) 5R short-time big hit B design is decided as the 5R big hit design of the special design.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines a lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S137, selects one of the lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, reach lose, lose). The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbol changes and stops, when the jackpot is specified from the received determination result notification command, the jackpot symbol (the left, middle, and right ornamental symbols are [0] ~ [8] same pattern combination), and if reach reach is specified, lose design with reach (left and right decorative designs are [0] ~ [8] same design) Combination of patterns with different middle decoration patterns; reach loss pattern) is decided, and if the loss is specified, loss pattern without reach (at least left / right of left / middle / right decoration patterns) The decorative pattern is determined to be a combination of different symbols), and the determined stop symbol is display-controlled when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set If it is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and when neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal loss (reach effect). If the result is not executed), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) Is selected (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Thus, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol. The production control will be performed.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and design random numbers (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the pattern random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variable random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach production to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach production is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers have a low jackpot expectation. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 types of variable random numbers are determination values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation is to be executed. ) Is set as. Note that the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, so that for a player who desires the occurrence of a big-hit game, the expectation of the player for the big-hit game is increased when the super-reach effect is executed. It has become.

  Further, in the variation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds are set as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, and 4 to 60 seconds are set in the time saving state. The corresponding fluctuation time is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time saving state and 2 to 60 seconds in the time saving state.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the count value of the hour / hour counter is set to "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S153). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the processing of step S151 that the count value of the hour / hour counter is "0", and if it is determined that the hour / hour counter is not "0" in the processing of step S153, then Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process ends.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 129, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S171. As the processing of 1, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern lottery processing (step S82) is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process ends.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 130, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of one special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). As a result, the time saving control is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, one time, or five times). The control of the non-time saving state is started.

  Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (time for displaying that the big hit game is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches "0", it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to finish the big hit game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the special winning opening opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches "0", and the big winning is opened. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S92), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0". Then, the process shifts to the big winning mouth opening post-process (step S93) to end the jackpot game. Control to be executed.

  Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R hour / hour short / big hit A start command, 5R hour / hour short / big hit A start command) is set in accordance with the type of jackpot (14R hour / hour short / big hit A start command). As a result, the effect display of the big hit game according to the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Further, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a big hit start command (14R time short big hit B start command, 5R time short big hit B start according to the type of big hit (14R time short big hit B) Command).

  In addition, the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, the big winning opening after-opening process (step S93) of the big hit control process (step S40) Opening / closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after winning 10 game balls B in the first special winning opening 2005) When the first count sensor 2512 detects that the opening / closing pattern for closing the opening / closing pattern is repeated 14 times or 5 times), it is reset when all the rounds that can be executed in the big hit game are finished. While the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is used. The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become executable.

  If the big hit flag is not set (step S186), and the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S191), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S191, the small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit according to the kind of small hit (5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A) A start command). Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. In the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a small hit start command (5R small hit B1) corresponding to the type of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B) Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command) are set.

  In addition, the small hitting execution flag which indicates that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is finished, specifically, the small hitting processing (step S401) of the small hitting control processing (step S41) described later. ) Open / close control of the first big winning opening 2005 according to the type of small hit (for example, after opening the first big winning opening 2005 (for example, 1.8 seconds) or after the game ball B is at the first big winning opening 2005). It is reset when the opening and closing control for closing when the first count sensor 2512 detects that the individual prize has been won. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol in the vessel and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  Also, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if it becomes a loss, set the interval timer to the waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. (Step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

  When the processing of steps S186 to S194 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then (step S195), this process ends.

    FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board 1510 is informed to the player of the fact that the special display (first special design, second special design) when the variable display is stopped becomes a big hit design based on the fact that the mode is changed to the big hit design. Pre-processing for opening the special winning opening, which waits until the next round is started or until the next round is started (step S91)
2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a big hit symbol, the first big prize hole 2005 and the second big prize hole 2006 are controlled to be in an open state, or the next round is started. The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to be open, and the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or Processing for opening the special winning opening which is closed when the first count sensor 2512 or the second count sensor 2513 detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (step) S92)
3. After the completion of all rounds, the jackpot opening post-processing that stands by until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game is over (step S93)

  The jackpot process flag is operated so as to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S91) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 118). In the processing for opening the special winning opening (step S92), at the start of a round for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round of setting and controlling the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 to a closed state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display of the big hit game according to the number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hitting process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hitting process flag.

1. Small hitting start processing which executes the setting processing for starting the small hitting game (step S400)
2. Processing during small hit (step S401) which monitors the entering and opening time of the game ball B during the small hit game

  The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118). Also, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small hitting process, the big hitting flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hitting game according to the type of the small hitting (5R small 4 rounds if there is a hit, 13 rounds if there is a 14R small hit) are set in the big hit number counter, and the processing ends. As a result, the big hit game is started following the small hit game.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process processing (step S15).

  Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2301 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Run.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) in which lottery processing or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the random symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)
4. Normally the variation control stop mode of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control stop of the symbol is normally displayed as the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "universal pattern win", a process for controlling the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 is possible. Ordinary electric accessory release process to be executed (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate portion passing process (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if the detection signal by the gate sensor 2301 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 134, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains, from the RAM of the main control MPU, the counter value of the normal reserved number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area as the process of step S811. .. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of storages of the above-mentioned normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols in the suspended state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S813, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the processing of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

  However, in the processing of the step S811, when it is determined that the number of storages of the normal symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure fluctuation random number are not acquired from the above random number counter), the variable display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

  Note that the gate passage process (step S802) may be another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines the above. The ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned ordinary reserved number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is judged whether or not the reserved memory number of ordinary symbols is "4" which is its maximum value. To do. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved storage of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned symbol into the newly-held state, the above-mentioned ordinary-reserved number counter is incremented (1 is added. ), And then the previously obtained ordinary random number, the universal figure variation random number (the ordinary random number stored in the temporary storage area, the universal figure variation random number) among the storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU. Stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal reservation number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value of the above-mentioned normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the holding storage number of the above-mentioned normal symbol is In the case of the maximum value), the normal random number acquired previously, the general pattern fluctuation random number is discarded without storing in the normal symbol reserve storage area, and the variable display control of the acquired normal symbol is newly added. It may be set so that it is not held.

  FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S821, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, next, as the processing of step S822, the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is normally stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, universal figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, while counting down the normal holding number counter, when the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. The shift operation is performed in the first-in first-out (first-in first-out) mode for the random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) relating to the display mode in FIG.

  Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 is from the first (first) area. Store in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area Is stored, and various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary figure per hit determination table shown in FIG. 136 (A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

  The universal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 136 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the universal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, the ordinary random numbers are set so that all 10 types of ordinary random numbers match the universal figure hit determination value indicating that the ordinary figure is won. It is associated. In other words, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the winning is always won per universal figure.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the per-universal figure hit is the result of the comparison between the ordinary-drawing hit determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S829), The variation per winning symbol is selected for the universal symbol, and the universal symbol flag is set (step S830), and the regular symbol variation control stop mode (normal symbol stop symbol) is determined as the universal symbol per symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal design is not hit, the general design lost design is determined as the mode (normal design stop design) when the variation control of the normal design is stopped (step S833).

  Then, after the lottery process for the ordinary symbols is performed in this way, as a process of step S834, the lottery result (instruction of either normal figure or loss) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the universal figure determination result notification command according to each result. Then, after that, as the process of step S835, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804), this process ends.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the time saving flag is set. If (step S841), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving is selected (step S842), and if the time saving flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving is selected. (Step S843).

  Then, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol to be executed (general symbol variation pattern) is determined by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process (step S844). ), A normal display fluctuation display of the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display unit of the function display unit 1400 by setting the normal pattern change pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal pattern change in the determined general pattern change pattern Is started (step S845).

  Further, when the main control MPU determines the universal figure fluctuation pattern, the main control MPU sets a universal figure variation time corresponding to the determined universal figure variation pattern in the universal figure variation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed on the normal symbol display device (in the variable symbol display of the normal symbol) of the function display unit 1400 only for the universal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the determined universal symbol fluctuation pattern.

  Further, in the non-time saving ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table of this example, 20 seconds is set as the universal symbol variation time. On the other hand, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the time saving of this example, 0.8 seconds as the universal symbol variation time so that the universal symbol variation time is shorter than the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time reduction Is set. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, when the variable display control of the normal symbol is started, next, as the process of step S847, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation process (step S805), this The process ends.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S851, In step S846, the universal figure fluctuation timer in which the universal figure fluctuation time is set is decremented by 1. Then, the universal figure variation time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, at the time when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806), this process ends.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop processing (step S806).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 139, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S861, While performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. Then, the normal figure stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

  Then, next, when the universal figure hitting flag is set (step S863), a second starting opening corresponding to the current game state is made by using the universal figure hitting time open pattern table shown in FIG. 136 (B). The opening pattern of 2004 is set (step S864).

  Specifically, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in the non-time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the non-time saving state is controlled when the opening of the second starting port 2004 is started, the second starting port 2004 is opened / closed when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained as the drawing hit. The starting opening solenoid 2514 is turned on to execute the opening pattern A in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 is short, and the game ball when the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state. Is difficult to enter. That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the second starting opening 2004 is opened / closed, the game ball hardly enters.

  On the other hand, if the second starting opening 2004 is controlled to be in the time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004. That is, if the non-time saving state is controlled when the opening of the second starting port 2004 is started, the second starting port 2004 is opened / closed when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained as the drawing hit. The starting opening solenoid 2514 is turned on to execute the opening pattern B in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example). Thereby, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 is long, and the game ball when the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state. You can enter.

  When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, then as a process of step S885, a universal figure per start command indicating that the universal figure per game is started is set, and an ordinary symbol process flag is set to an ordinary electric accessory. When the process is updated so that the process shifts to the open process (step S866), this process ends. Note that the universal figure start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the universal figure game according to the type of universal figure instructed by the universal figure start command is the effect display device 1600. It can be executed by a lamp, an LED, a speaker and the like.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the normal symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal electric auditors product opening process (step S807).

  Now, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 140, as shown in FIG. If a predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed since the control MPU controlled the second starting port 2004 to be in the open state (step S872), the second When the starting opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the starting opening 2004 is turned off and the second starting opening 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 causes the second start port 2004 to close, as shown in FIG. If it is the timing to open the switch (step S874), the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second start port 2004 is turned on to control the second start port 2004 to the open state (step S875). The process ends.

  In the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 causes the second starting port 2004 to open, as shown in FIG. 140. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (the number of times of opening the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), the universal figure end command is set (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. It should be noted that the universal figure hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the universal figure end command, the effect display device 1600, the effect of the universal figure hit game being executed by the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Can be terminated.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 141, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU executes an 2 mS steady process by generating an interrupt every 2 mS. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 mS has elapsed when 16 mS has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Based on the result, the control process related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to various decorative substrates 184, 273 and the like is executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady process ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning when 16 mS has elapsed since the 16 mS steady-state process was started (command of step S601. Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16 mS elapse flag is set in step S502 after the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is executed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 mS steady process in the sub-main process.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the production control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the production process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command (first variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation pattern) instructing a variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the command analysis process. After performing the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, and the like based on the second change pattern command for instructing the change pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value according to the change effect process. Change production start process to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special symbol (second One special symbol, the second special symbol) fluctuation production during processing to change the production process flag to a value according to the variation end processing in response to the passage of the variation time according to the variation pattern (step S712)
3. Performs a process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command instructing the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if it is lost, the above effect Variable production end processing that changes the process flag to a value according to the variation production start processing, if it is a big hit, to a value according to the big hit production processing, and if it is a small hit, to a value according to the small hit production processing (Step S713)
4. Based on the fact that the big hit start command which instructs the start of the big hit game is received, processing for executing the display control during the big hit game is performed on the effect display device 1600, and when the big hit game is finished, the effect process flag is changed. Big hit production process to change to a value according to the production start process (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command for instructing the start of the small hit game, processing for executing display control during the small hit game is performed on the effect display device 1600, and the second big winning opening during the small hit game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to the specific area, the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit effect start processing when the small hit game is finished, and the game ball B is allocated to the specific area. If not, a small hit production process of changing to a value according to the variation production start process (step S715)

  The special symbol display device (first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400) by the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of No.

[10. Fluctuation control at the end of time saving control]
As described above, in the time saving state, the opening / closing control of the second starting port 2004 is performed in an opening pattern different from that in the non-time saving state. That is, if the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is a time saving state when it is in a short time state, the opening pattern A of the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is used as the second starting opening 2004. If the non-time saving state when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped by opening and closing, the second opening pattern B in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

  In this way, since the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004 is changed with reference to the time when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, immediately before the time saving state ends (for example, the time saving number of times). If the time saving state A of 100 times, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) of the special symbol in the time saving state (just before the 100th variable display stops) In the case of opening and closing the second starting port 2004 after stopping the normal symbol variation executed in, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in the open pattern B in the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example). Will be done. Further, when the time saving state ends after the second starting opening 2004 is opened, the player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time saving state is being executed even though the time saving state has ended. Further, there may be a case where a start winning a prize to the second start opening 2004 occurs at an unexpected time such as after the symbol variation is started in the non-time saving state after the end of the time saving state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the variable display of the second special symbol is hardly executed, but to the second starting opening 2004 despite the non-time saving state The start winning award occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), and while the game progresses, the behavior gives the player a feeling of strangeness, which may lead to a decline in the entertainment appeal of the game.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when stopping the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 with a lost symbol (for example, the first One special symbol stop process step S194), usually, as a standby time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started, "0.5 seconds" is set to the interval timer. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process process (step S28) and the second special symbol process process (step S39), and until the interval timer times out, the special symbol display (first in the function display unit 1400). One special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device) is controlled so that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not started.

  In addition, when the time saving state ends, that is, when the symbol variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game reaches the number of time reductions, when the symbol variation stops (time reduction When the last symbol fluctuation in the state has stopped), the interval timer "2 seconds" is set as the waiting time (time for displaying the special symbol stop symbol) until the next special symbol fluctuation display is started. set. As described above, in the time saving state, after changing the second starting port 2004 to the open state, the second starting port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, by setting the interval timer to "2 seconds" when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state is stopped and the time saving state is ended, before the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started. It is possible to change the two starting ports 2004 to a closed state, whereby it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a starting winning prize for the second starting port 2004 after the symbol variation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started.

  The period set in the interval timer when the last symbol variation in the time saving state ends and the time saving state ends is at least equivalent to the opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 in the time saving state (in this example, "1. 5 seconds ") or more. Further, when the last symbol variation in the time saving state is stopped and the time saving state is ended and the second special winning opening 2006 is not changed to the open state, as the waiting time until the next variation display of the special symbol is started. You may make it set the same time as usual ("0.5 second" in this example).

  In this way, when the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops), regardless of the presence or absence of the first holding number and the second holding number, within a predetermined period By suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (judgment determination), time saving control that can be continued after the final special lottery result in the time saving state has been derived (after the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state has stopped) Can be ended within the predetermined period, and the second holding number can be prevented from increasing after the end of the time saving control. As a result, despite the non-time saving state, the game proceeds with a behavior not intended by the game designer that a start winning is generated in the second start opening 2004 and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Since this can be prevented and the game progress in the behavior intended by the game designer (the game characteristic intended by the game designer) can be suitably realized, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. .

  In the above example, when the judgment whether or not it is the time saving state (the judgment as to whether or not to end the time saving state), when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, Although shown as what to do as a reference, when starting the normal symbol variation executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to determine whether it is a time saving state (for example, the normal symbol normal process (step S803) May be performed or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is performed) may be performed as a reference. In this case, at least, the variation time of the normal symbol variation (normal symbol variation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example) executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time-saving state, and in the time-saving state. The opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 (“1.5 seconds” in this example) may be equal to or longer than the total period (“2.3 seconds” in this example).

[11. Hold notice effect and hold change effect]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the hold display is displayed until the hold display is consumed. By changing, it is possible to execute a hold announcement effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree for a variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the hold display. Further, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change.

  Specifically, based on the game ball winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied), the main control board 1310 transmits a reservation number designation command and a preliminary determination command. .. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the command analysis process of step S601, when the hold number designation command and the preliminary determination command are received, the hold advance notice determination table corresponding to these commands, that is, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command. (Number of pending storages) and pre-judgment information specified from the pre-judgment command (big hit, small hit, reach lost, lost) corresponding to the pending notice decision table selected, the judgment set in the pending notice decision table By comparing the value with the read random number for determining the pending notice, the type of the pending notice pattern set in the pending notice determination table is determined. In the pending notice determination table, the judgment value is assigned to each pending notice pattern differently for each of the preliminary decision information (either big hit, small hit, reach lose, or lose) specified by the advance decision command. The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

  Further, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied), the number of holdings (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command is increased, so that the effect display The device 1600 is additionally displayed with one hold display. On the other hand, when the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold number (hold storage number) specified by the hold number designation command decreases. , The hold display on the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern, and the hold display is displayed. Each time the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display of the special symbols) based on another hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative design based on the suspended display (variable display of the special design) is started (start condition is satisfied), the suspended display is erased, but the decorative design is changed. Even after the start of the variable display (variable display of the special symbol), the hold display may be continuously displayed, and the display mode of the hold display may be changeable. In such a case, before and after the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started, the position at which the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 is moved, like other hold displays. By doing so, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may be changed by the execution of the hold change effect (hold move movement change effect, muzzle hold change effect, billiard hold change effect) described below.

  Next, a pending notice determination table in which a plurality of types of pending notice patterns are set for each pending number (number of pending storages) specified by the pending number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145. The pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 144 (A) is a pending notice determination table used when holding 1 is on (holding number = 1), and FIG. 144 (B) is a holding notice determination table used when holding 2 is on (holding number = 2). FIG. 144 (C) is a table for determining a reservation notice used when the hold 3 is turned on (hold number = 3), and FIG. 145 (D) is used when the hold 4 is turned on (hold number = 4). 7 is a pending notice determination table for execution.

  As described above, a plurality of types of hold notice patterns are set in the hold notice determination table corresponding to the hold number (holding storage number). The number of memories is set by how much the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 changes each time the hold storage is exhausted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 may change in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 1 is turned on (the number of hold = 1). None (that is, only the hold display is consumed), and the hold notice pattern in which only the display mode of one hold display is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), the display mode of the hold display can be changed once before the hold display is consumed in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 2 is turned on (the number of hold = 2). Therefore, the pending notice pattern in which the display mode of the pending display for two times is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), the display mode of the hold display can be changed twice before the hold display is consumed in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 3 is turned on (the number of hold = 3). Therefore, the pending notice pattern in which the display form of the pending display for three times is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), in the pending notice determination table used when the pending 4 is turned on (the number of pending = 4), the display mode of the pending display can be changed three times before the pending display is consumed. Therefore, the pending notice pattern in which the display mode of the pending display for four times is set is associated.

  Further, as a display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 set to the hold notice pattern, four displays are displayed so that the hold display is displayed in any one of white (basic color), blue, red, and rainbow color. Aspects are provided. Then, when deciding the pending notice pattern from the pending notice decision table, as a result of the display mode of the pending display changing to the end, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color. Is set to be. In other words, when the lottery result is specified as the pre-determination information, it is determined with a high probability that a pending notice pattern that will be a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, rainbow color) is displayed as a final display mode of the hold display. When the lottery result is determined to be lost as the determination information (loss, reach loss), the probability of determining a pending notice pattern that is a display mode with a low jackpot expectation degree (for example, white) as the final display mode of the pending display is high. Therefore, when the final hold display mode is displayed in a display mode with high jackpot expectation, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased.

  It should be noted that the hold notice pattern does not change the display mode of the hold display in the reverse order of the order of white → blue → red → rainbow color, and the display mode of the hold display is maintained when the hold display is consumed. Alternatively, the following display mode is set to be a display mode with a high jackpot expectation. Therefore, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode of low jackpot expectation, there is still a possibility that the display mode of the jackpot expectation is changed when the hold display is exhausted. It is possible to draw attention to the aspect to the end with expectations.

  In addition, in the pending notice pattern, the display mode of the pending display does not necessarily have to be changed in the order of blue → red → rainbow color after being displayed in white (basic color). Starting from a mode (for example, suddenly starting with a rainbow color due to the reservation notice pattern number 4 when the hold 1 is lit), or skipping one or more display modes and changing to the next display mode (for example, when the hold 2 is lit) It is also set to change from white (basic color) to rainbow color by the pending notice pattern number 7 of. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of holdings) for changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display can be displayed with a display mode with a high jackpot expectation. Further, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode changes to, and the display mode of the hold display is completed until the end. You can get attention with expectations.

  Further, in the pending notice determination table, only when the big hit is specified as the preliminary decision information from the preliminary decision command, the rainbow-colored pending notice pattern (the pending notice pattern number when the hold 1 is lit) is displayed as the final hold display. 4, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10 when hold 2 is turned on, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7 when hold 3 is turned on, etc., hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7 when hold 4 is turned on) Is set to be possible. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is exhausted, and the expectation of the player for the big hit game is increased. .

  Further, in the pending notice determination table, when a deviation is specified as the preliminary judgment information from the preliminary judgment command, the final warning display pattern of white (basic color) or blue is displayed as the final pending display pattern (when holding 1 is turned on). (Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 2 is lit, etc., hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 3 is lit, and hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 4 is lit) On the other hand, when the big hit, the small hit, and the reach are specified as the pre-judgment information from the pre-judgment command, the pending notice pattern that becomes red as the display mode of the final pending display (the pending notice pattern when the hold 1 is lit) Number 3, hold notice pattern numbers 3, 6 and 8 when hold 2 is on, hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 3 is on, and hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 4 is on) Is set to be possible. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in red, it is determined that at least the reach will be reached when the hold display is exhausted and the reach effect is executed, and the expectation of the player for the big hit game and the small hit game. Is increasing.

  In the present embodiment, by determining the hold notice pattern at the start of displaying the hold display, the series of contents in which the display mode of the hold display changes until the hold display is exhausted is determined. However, as the determination method, only the display mode of the hold display at the start and the display mode of the final hold display may be determined when the display of the hold display is started. When the display mode of the hold display at the start and the display mode of the final hold display are different, at least the display mode of the final hold display before the target hold display is consumed. The display mode of the hold display may be determined every time when the display mode of the hold display can be changed so that “is displayed”. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is exhausted.

  Next, a hold change effect that suggests a possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes during the display period of the hold display will be described below. In the above-mentioned hold notice production, the display mode of the hold display can be changed every time the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the hold display. At the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed, the hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display is changed can be executed.

  Specifically, in the peripheral control board 1510, at the time of starting the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) (start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display changes based on the hold notice pattern. By determining whether or not, select the hold change effect determination table corresponding to the determination result, by comparing the determination value set in the hold change effect determination table and the read random number for hold change effect determination, The type of the hold change effect pattern set in the hold change effect determination table is determined. That is, whether or not to execute the hold change effect, and when executing the hold change effect, the type of the hold change effect is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of types of hold change effect patterns are set in the hold change effect determination table, and a hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect, Hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) that executes the hold movement change effect as the hold change effect, hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) that executes the muffle hold change effect as the hold change effect, hold change A hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing a billiard hold change effect is set as an effect. The pending change effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in the hold change effect determination table, the distribution of the determination value for each of the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect is about the same, and the appearance rate of each hold change effect is high. However, the distribution of the determination values may be different so that the appearance rates of the respective pending change effects are different.

  In the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) that execute the hold change effect. On the other hand, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change, most of the determinations are made for the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) in which the hold change effect is not executed. The values are distributed. In this way, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the hold change effect is always executed, and when the hold change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes with a high probability. Therefore, it is possible to expect with attention whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold change effect.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit is four as the number of holdings (holding storage number), but the number of holding displays corresponding to the number of holdings can be displayed in the four corners of the rectangular display area in the effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the hold 1 (hold number = 1) is turned on, the hold display is displayed at the lower left position of the display area, and when the hold 2 (hold number = 2) is turned on, the hold display is held at the lower right position of the display area. When the hold 3 (hold number = 3) is turned on, a hold display is displayed at the upper right position of the display area, and when hold 4 (hold number = 4) is turned on, the hold is held at the upper left position of the display area. The display is displayed. As a general rule, when the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold display of hold 1 displayed at the lower left position of the display area is erased. Accordingly, the other hold displays of the holds 2 to 4 are moved clockwise while being displayed in the display area.

  First, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) in which the hold change effect is not executed, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, after the move from the position before the move. It is designed to move linearly at the shortest distance to the position.

  Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) that executes the hold move change effect as the hold change effect, before the move when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves. Unlike the case where the hold change effect is not executed from the position of to the position after the movement, the movement is performed in a non-linear manner, and the hold display is performed during the movement (before reaching the position after the movement). The display mode of can be changed. Further, when executing the hold movement change effect, compared with the case where the hold display moves linearly (when the hold change effect is not executed), in the period until the hold display reaches the position after movement, There is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change. Further, in the hold movement change effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided in which the manner in which the hold display moves is different from the case where the hold change effect is not executed, and when the hold display moves linearly (hold change effect The longer the moving distance is, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display is changed becomes higher than that in the case (when not executed). In the present embodiment, the longer the distance the hold display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes. However, as another example, regardless of the distance the hold display moves, at first glance Thus, the more complicated the manner in which the hold display is moved (for example, the greater the number of times of crossing as the movement path of the hold display is), the higher the possibility that the display manner of the hold display is changed is increased. Further, as another example of the hold movement change effect, the longer the distance the hold display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, rainbow color). You may set it.

  Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change change effect pattern number 3) that executes the muffle hold change effect as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, before the move. When the hold display moves from the position to the outside of the display area, it is erased once, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the hold display returns to the display area and reaches the position after the movement. The display mode of the hold display can be changed. In addition, in the case of performing the muzzle hold change effect, as compared with the case where the hold change effect is not executed (when the hold display is not erased outside the display area and moves linearly), the position of the hold display after the movement is changed. There is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change during the period until reaching. Further, in the muzzle hold change effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided outside the display area at different times when the hold display is erased, and the longer the erase time is, the more the display mode of the hold display can be changed. The nature is high. As another example of the muzzle hold change effect, as the hold display is erased outside the display area for a longer time, the display mode of the hold display may change to a display mode with a higher jackpot expectation (for example, rainbow color). May be set to be higher.

  In the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) that executes the billiard hold change effect as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, a billiard ball is displayed. If a similar sphere display appears in a predetermined display mode, the sphere display bounces multiple times in the display area, and then the sphere display collides with the hold display at the position after the movement, the sphere display Is a new hold display, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed to the display mode of the ball display depending on whether or not the ball display collides. That is, when the billiard hold change effect is not executed, the ball display does not appear, and the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold display reaches the position after movement, whereas the billiard hold change effect is displayed. When executed, the sphere display appears, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed after the hold display reaches the position after the movement. In addition, when the billiard hold change effect is executed, the hold display is moved as compared with the case where the hold change effect is not executed (the hold display moves linearly and the ball display does not appear). There is a high possibility that the display mode of the display will change. In addition, in the present embodiment, even when the effect display different from the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (effect display accompanied by the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the change pattern) changes, The same effect as the billiard hold change effect can be executed. Specifically, a sphere display that resembles a billiard sphere appears in a predetermined display mode, and after the sphere display bounces multiple times in the display area, if the sphere display collides with the effect display, The effect display is changing. Therefore, even when the ball display does not collide with the hold display, it is possible to expect with attention whether or not the presentation display changes due to the collision with the presentation display.

  In the present embodiment, the pending notice effect and the pending change effect are performed in the non-time saving state. In the non-time saving state, the second special symbol side holding memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 hardly occurs, based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. In addition, since the hold storage on the first special symbol side can occur, only the hold display based on the hold storage on the first special symbol side is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the non-time saving state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area and the symbol display area in which the effect display accompanied by the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the variable pattern is performed. It is divided into a hold display area in which a hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories on the special symbol side is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the symbol display area is reduced to about 80%. In this way, in the non-time saving state, since the hold display areas are separately provided, the hold display displayed in the hold display area can be made conspicuous, and the display mode of the hold display changes by executing the hold notice effect. It makes it easier to pay attention to whether or not to do it. Also, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit is low, and it is difficult to expect for variable display and effect display of decorative symbols performed in the symbol display area, but it is displayed in the hold display area. Since the held display that is displayed is conspicuous, it can be expected that the display mode of the held display will change, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pending notice effect and the pending change effect are performed during the normal fluctuation, which is a stage of whether or not the reach state is formed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, when the hold change effect is not executed, the symbol display area is reduced to about 80% of the display area, whereas when the hold change effect is executed, 60% of the display area is further increased. The pattern display area is reduced to a certain degree. In this way, when the symbol display area is changed from about 80% to about 60% of the display area, the hold change effect is performed on the hold display displayed in the hold display area. When is decreased, it can be expected to be noticed that the pending change effect is performed on the pending display. Further, when executing the hold change effect, by expanding the hold display area, the effect contents of the hold change effect with respect to the hold display displayed in the hold display area can be made conspicuous, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. It makes it easier to pay attention to how the process changes. The hold display area is provided as an area in which the hold display is waited and the hold display is moved regardless of whether the hold change effect is performed on the hold display. In a part of the execution of, it is allowed that the hold display moves across the symbol display area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reach state is formed as the variable display of the decorative symbol during the normal variation, the symbol display region is returned to 100% of the display region as the hold display region is erased. .. That is, after the reach state is formed, the reach effect is performed using the symbol display area returned to 100%. In this way, when the reach effect is executed, the design display area is expanded, so that the hold display is changed from the state in which it can be noticed during the normal state, and the reach effect is displayed as the effect display in the design display area. It can be noticed.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol display area is reduced to about 60% of the display area when any of the hold movement change effect, the muzzle hold change effect, and the billiard hold change effect are executed as the hold change effect. The proportion of decrease in the symbol display area may be changed according to the expected degree of the pending change effect to be executed (the display mode of the pending display may change). For example, in the case of executing a hold change effect in which the display mode of the hold display is highly likely to change, the rate of decrease of the symbol display area is increased, while the display mode of the hold display is unlikely to change. When the hold change effect is executed, the rate at which the symbol display area decreases may be lowered. According to this, the possibility of changing the display mode of the hold display does not necessarily need to be grasped by executing the hold change effect, and can also be grasped by the rate of decrease of the symbol display area.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when the hold change effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149. FIG. 147 is a specific example of effect on the effect display device 1600 when executing the hold movement change effect, and FIG. 148 is a specific example of effect on the effect display device 1600 when executing the muffle hold change effect. Yes, FIG. 149 is a specific example of effect on the effect display device 1600 when the billiard hold change effect is executed.

  First, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when the hold movement change effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 147 (A), in the non-time saving state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area 1600a that occupies about 80% of the display area and the symbol display area 1600a. The display area is divided into a reserved display area 1600b that occupies about 20% of the display area. In this symbol display area 1600a, effect display including the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c based on the variable pattern and the symbol background display (the symbol background image) around the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is performed. On the other hand, in the hold display area 1600b, a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storages on the first special symbol side and a hold background display (hold background image) around these hold displays are performed, but in the present production example, Hold display 1601a of hold 1 at the lower left position of the display area, hold display 1601b of hold 2 at the lower right position of the display area, hold display 1601c of hold 3 at the upper right position of the display area, upper left of the display area The hold display 1601d of the hold 4 is displayed at the position of, and the hold background display is displayed at other portions. This hold background display is displayed in a manner different from the pattern background display (for example, different background color), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a pattern display area 1600a and a hold display area 1600b. This makes it easy to recognize. The display modes of the hold displays 1601a to 1601d of the hold 1 to 4 are white. Further, with respect to the hold display 1601d of the hold 4, when the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 is turned on, the display mode is changed from white → blue → red → rainbow color (the hold advance notice pattern when the hold 4 is turned on). The number 18) has been determined.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of hold 1, the hold movement change effect is executed with respect to the hold display 1601d of hold 4. Based on the fact that the symbol display area 1600a is determined, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. Further, as the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is deleted, the hold displays 1601b to 1601d of other hold 2 to 4 start moving clockwise while being displayed in the display area. Further, the hold displays 1601b and 1601c of the hold 2 and 3 are determined to not execute the hold change effect for the hold displays 1601b and 1601c of the hold 2 and 3, and up to the position after the movement. While moving linearly at the shortest distance, the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 is moved to the position after the move based on the execution of the hold move change effect being determined for the hold display 1601d of the hold 4. , Meandering and moving. In this effect example, the display mode is changed from white to blue while the hold display 1601d of hold 4 is moving. In addition, as a change of the display mode during the movement of the hold display, for example, the color at the start of movement (white in the example of the effect) is kept and does not change until the intermediate point of the movement route is reached. The gradation change that gradually approaches the color after the movement (blue in this example of performance) from the time of reaching, and completes the change to the color after movement (blue in the example of performance) when the movement is completed. Etc. can be illustrated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), after the predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed as the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c, but before the predetermined time has elapsed, the hold 2-4 The reservation displays 1601b to 1601d have been moved. At this point, the new hold displays 1601a and 1601b of the new hold 1 and 2 are white in display form, whereas the new hold display 1601c of hold 3 is blue in display form.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started again based on the hold display 1601a of hold 1, the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is deleted, The reservation displays 1601b and 1601c of the reservations 2 and 3 other than the above start moving clockwise while being displayed in the display area. In addition, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is linearly moved to the position after the move by the shortest distance based on the determination that the hold change effect is not executed for the hold display 1601b of hold 2. On the other hand, the hold display 1601c of the hold 3 moves meanderingly to the position after the move based on the execution of the hold movement change effect being determined for the hold display 1601c of the hold 3. In this effect example, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601c of hold 3 is moving.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), after a predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed as the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c, but before the predetermined time elapses, the hold 2, 3 The reservation displays 1601b and 1601c have been moved. At this point, the new hold display 1601a for hold 1 has a white display mode, whereas the new hold display 1601b for hold 2 has a red display mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started again based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased. The hold display 1601b of hold 2 other than the above starts moving clockwise while being displayed in the display area. Further, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves meanderingly to the position after the move based on the execution of the hold movement change effect being determined for the hold display 1601b of hold 2. In this example of performance, it is possible to recognize that the display mode of the hold display is longer than the distance moved by the hold display when the display mode of the hold display changes from white to blue or blue to red, and the display mode of the hold display is likely to change. it can. Further, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves, it crosses the front side of the symbol display area 1600a, so it is easy to pay attention to whether or not the display mode changes. In addition, in the present effect example, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is moving.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), after the predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed as the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c, but the hold 2 is held before the predetermined time elapses. The movement of the display 1601b is completed. At this time, the new hold display 1601a of the hold 1 has a rainbow color display mode. However, when the display mode is displayed in a rainbow color, the lottery result is a big hit when the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is exhausted. Since it is determined that, the expectation of the player for the big hit game can be increased.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when the muzzle hold change effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the hold display area 1600b, a hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side is performed, but in the effect example, the hold is held at the lower left position of the display area. The hold display 1601a of 1 and the hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed at the lower right position of the display area. The display mode of the hold display 1601a for hold 1 and the hold display 1601b for hold 2 is white. For the hold display 1601b of hold 2, a hold notice pattern (hold notice pattern number 6 when hold 2 is turned on) in which the display mode changes from white to red when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is turned on is determined. Has been done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the muffle hold change effect is executed for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. Based on the fact that the symbol display area 1600a is determined, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. Further, as the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is deleted, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is moved to the outside of the display area and is once deleted.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 148 (C) and (D), after the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves to the outside of the display area, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves to the position after the move. The light emitted from the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is moved as if the light is moved in the display area. Further, as the light moves within the display area, countdowns of "3", "2", "1", and "0" are displayed. This countdown corresponds to the time when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is erased, and the longer the erase time is, the closer the countdown is to "0". That is, when the erased time is long, the countdown can reach “0”, whereas when the erased time is short, the countdown ends without reaching “0”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), after the lapse of the time when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is erased, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 returns to the hold display area 1600b, but at the time of the return, The display mode is changed to red. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), before the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is stopped and displayed, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is finished moving. At this point, the new hold display 1601a of the hold 1 has a red display mode, but if the display mode is displayed in red, at least the reach display is reached when the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is exhausted. Since it is decided to execute the effect, the expectation of the player for the big hit game and the small hit game can be increased.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when the billiard hold change effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 149 (A), in the hold display area 1600b, a hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side is performed, but in the effect example, the hold is placed at a lower left position of the display area. The hold display 1601a of 1 and the hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed at the lower right position of the display area. Further, the hold display of the hold 1 and the hold 2 has a white display mode. For the hold display 1601b of hold 2, a hold notice pattern (hold notice pattern number 6 when hold 2 is turned on) in which the display mode changes from white to red when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is turned on is determined. Has been done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of hold 1, the billiard hold change effect is executed for the hold display 1601b of hold 2. Based on the fact that the symbol display area 1600a is determined, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. Further, as the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is deleted, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is determined based on the execution of the billiard hold change effect for the hold display 1601b of hold 2 being determined first. It moves linearly at the shortest distance to the position after the movement while the display mode is maintained in white. When the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves, the ball display 1602 that resembles a billiard ball appears in the hold display area 1600b in a red display mode. At this point, if the ball display 1602 appears in a red display mode, the reserved display 1601a of the new hold 1 may change to a red display mode by executing the billiard holding change effect. The expectation of the player can be increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 149C, when the sphere display 1602 appears in the hold display area 1600b, an image imitating the central pressing operation portion 303a of the pressing operation portion 303 is displayed in the display area, and the central pressing The player is urged to operate the operation unit 303a. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), when the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a within a predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is fired and the ball display 1602 is bound multiple times within the display area. Let On the other hand, even if the player does not operate the central pressing operation unit 303a within a predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is forcibly fired after the elapse of the predetermined time. In addition, in the example of the effect, the operation effect of whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a is performed, but at the present time, the variable time of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c (in the variable pattern). When the set fluctuation time) is 4 seconds or less (when it is not possible to provide a waiting time for the player to operate the central pressing operation unit 303a), the ball is not played without performing the operation effect. Fire display 1602. When the sphere display 1602 bounces multiple times, the sphere display 1602 crosses the front side of the symbol display area 1600a, so that the sphere display 1602 can be easily noticed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 149 (E) and (F), after the sphere display 1602 has bounced multiple times, the sphere display 1602 collides with the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 and the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is pushed out. As a result, the sphere display 1602 becomes a new hold display 1601a for hold 1. As a result, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 changes its display mode to red, which is the display mode of the spherical display 1602, before the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is stopped and displayed. At this point, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 has a red display mode, but when the display form is displayed in red, at least the reach is reached when the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is consumed, and the reach effect is produced. Since it is decided to execute the game, the expectation of the player for the big hit game and the small hit game can be increased. In the example of production, when the ball display 1602 bounces multiple times, only the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is displayed, and the hold display 1601a of hold 1 changes to a red display mode due to a collision with the ball display 1602. Although there is only a possibility of change, when two or more hold displays are displayed in the hold display area, which hold display collides with the sphere display 1602, that is, which hold display has a red display mode. It is not possible to determine if there is a possibility that it will change to. Therefore, when two or more hold displays are displayed in the hold display area, one of the hold displays changes to a red display mode (display mode of the ball display 1602) due to collision of the sphere display 1602. With such expectations, it is possible to draw attention to the direction in which the sphere display 1602 advances.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, it is possible to execute an effect equivalent to the billiard hold change effect. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 149 (E ′), after the ball display 1602 has bounced a plurality of times, the ball display 1602 collides with the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (F ′), the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, and an effect display that notifies that the “special mode” is entered appears as a new effect display. It is supposed to do. Therefore, even when the ball display 1602 does not collide with the hold display, it is possible to expect with attention whether or not the production display changes due to the collision with the production display.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the color is changed as the display mode of the hold display, but the display mode of the hold display is changeable at a timing not limited to the change of the color. It is also possible to "add a predetermined additional decoration display (character or the like) to the hold display". In such a case, the jackpot expectation level is made different depending on the type of the additional decoration display added to the hold display.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the hold notice effect described above, when the hold move change effect is executed as the hold change effect, not only the change in the color but also in the process of moving the hold display, “a predetermined additional decoration display to the hold display is displayed. (A character or the like) may be added ”. For example, when the hold display moves due to execution of the hold movement change effect, the additional decoration display appears in the display area during the movement, the additional decoration display approaches the hold display, and the additional display is added to the hold display at the position after the movement. The effect of whether to be performed may be executed.

  In addition to the configuration of the hold notice effect described above, when executing the boring hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display is displayed after the hold display moves out of the display area, not limited to the color change. When returning to the area, “predetermined additional decorative display (character or the like) may be added to the hold display”. For example, after the hold display is moved to the outside of the display area by executing the muzzle hold change effect, the additional decoration display appears in the display area, the additional decoration display moves to the outside of the display area in the same manner as the hold display, and the hold display is displayed. The effect of whether or not the additional decoration display is added when returning to the display area may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is started, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced from about 80% of the display area to about 60%, whereas the hold display area 1600b is reduced from about 20% of the display area. It is increased to about 40%. In this way, in the hold change effect, the hold display area 1600b is enlarged, but the hold background display is also executed by using the enlarged hold display area 1600b. When the background movement change effect is executed as the hold change effect, for example, the hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b may be replaced with a character group of "chance!" While the hold display is moving. You may. Further, in the case of executing the muffle hold change effect as the hold change effect, for example, as a hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, “Come out while moving (erasing) the hold display to the outside of the display area. It may be replaced with a message consisting of an explanation message such as "If the color changes when you do so, chance!" Further, when the billiard hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect, for example, as a hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, “a chance to hit the ball! It may be replaced with a message including an explanation message such as "."

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is used as the display region in which the symbol display region 1600a and the hold display region 1600b are provided. Is divided into a symbol display area 1600a and a hold display area 1600b, and when the hold change effect is started, the symbol display area 1600a is decreased, while the hold display area 1600b is increased. Good. For example, of the two display devices, when the symbol display area 1600a is provided on the display device having a large display area and the hold display area 1600b is provided on the display device having a small display area, the hold change effect is started as a trigger, The display devices provided with the symbol display area 1600a and the hold display area 1600b may be replaced.

[12. Performance when over-winning in jackpot game]
In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are set with an upper limit of a predetermined round number (up to 14 rounds in the present embodiment) predetermined according to the big hit type. Is opened (the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are set in a state in which the game ball B can be received), and a round game is played. One round game is until the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once), and the first big winning is made during one round game. Until a specified number (upper limit number of prizes: 10 balls in this example) of game balls B is won in the mouth 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, or a specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) ) Is passed until it is released.

  In the above-described one round game, when the specified number (upper limit number of prizes: 10 balls in this example) of the game balls B are won in the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, the game balls B are open. One of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is closed. That is, when the first special winning opening 2005 is open, when the first count sensor 2512 detects the specified number of game balls B, the first attacker 2005 is closed so as to close the first special winning opening 2005. The solenoid 2515 is drive-controlled, but at that time, the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number (the over-winning prize) may have already occurred in the first special winning opening 2005. In such a case, After closing the first special winning opening 2005, the first count sensor 2512 detects the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number. Similarly, when the second special winning opening 2006 is open, the second attacker solenoid is closed so as to close the second special winning opening 2006 when the specified number of game balls B are detected by the second count sensor 2513. 2516 is driven and controlled, but at that time, there may be cases where the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number has already entered into the second special winning opening 2006 (over winning), and in such a case, After closing the two major winning openings 2006, the second count sensor 2513 detects the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number. Then, when an over-winning occurs, as a privilege for the player to obtain the payout of the game ball B exceeding the expectation, an effect using the effect display device 1600 is provided separately from the round effect performed in the round game. As the over-winning performance is being executed.

  Specifically, every time the round game in the big hit game is started, the main control board 1310 transmits a round start command instructing the number of rounds of the round game. Further, when the game ball B is won in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 and the game ball B is detected by the first count sensor 2512 or the second count sensor 2513, the main control board 1310 outputs the game ball B. A command at the time of winning is sent to notify that. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the round start command and the winning command are received, in the jackpot production process of step S714, the number of rounds of the round game being executed, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning. An effect based on the number of game balls B won in the mouth 2006 is executed as a round effect in the effect display device 1600. In addition, during each round of the big hit game, after the specified number of game balls B are won in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening It is determined whether or not the game ball B has won in 2006, that is, whether or not an over-winning has occurred. If an over-winning has occurred, the number of times the over-winning has occurred is counted over the execution of the jackpot game. To do. However, even when two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of over-winnings is 1 count.

  When an over-winning occurs, the over-winning effect is executed as an effect using the effect display device 1600. However, if the over-winning effect type is different according to the number of times the above-mentioned over-winning occurs. I am making it. Specifically, when the number of occurrences of over-winning is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, 7 times, any one of the characters A to E is determined and the determined character appears. On the other hand, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an even count of 2, 4, or 6 times, the fixed effect for causing the character corresponding to the number of times the over-winning has occurred is executed. .. In addition, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is the count after the eighth time, the premier fixed production that does not appear in the count up to the seventh time is executed.

  First, when the number of occurrences of over-winning is an odd number of 1, 3, 5, and 7, the character A is used for over-winning performance using the over-winning performance determination table shown in FIG. 150 (A). Determine which of E to appear. Specifically, by comparing the determination value set in the over-winning effect determination table with the read random number for determining over-winning effect determination, the type of the character set in the over-winning effect determination table is determined. To do. In this way, when the number of times the over-winning is generated is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, and 7, any one of the characters A to E is determined, and thus when the over-winning occurs. It is possible to pay attention to which character appears as an over-winning effect.

  The over-winning effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in the over-winning effect determination table, the determination values for the patterns in which the respective characters A to E appear are distributed to the same degree, and the appearance rates of the respective characters are set to the same degree. The distribution may be different so that the appearance rate of each character is different.

  When the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an even number of two times, it is determined that the character F appears in the over-winning performance, using the over-winning performance determination table shown in FIG. 150 (B). To do. Similarly, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an even count of four, it is possible to cause the character G to appear in the over-winning performance by using the over-winning performance determination table shown in FIG. 150 (C). If it is determined and the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an even number of 6, it is possible to cause the character H to appear in the over-winning performance by using the over-winning performance determination table shown in FIG. 150 (D). decide. In this way, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, the predetermined character is determined according to the number of times the over-winning has occurred, and thus the over-winning is performed. When the character occurs, it is possible to recognize how many times the over-winning has occurred due to the appearance of the character.

  When the number of times the over-winning has occurred is the eighth or later count, all the characters A to H appear in the over-winning performance using the over-winning performance determination table shown in FIG. 150 (E). Decide to let. In this way, when the number of occurrences of over-winning is up to the 7th time, the character appears only in the over-winning effect, whereas when it is the 8th and subsequent times, the over-winning occurs. Since all the characters A to H appear in the winning effect, it is possible to obtain a sense of accomplishment that the number of times of over-winning has exceeded the eighth time, while paying attention to the premium effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of times the over-winning occurs is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, and 7, one of the characters A to E is determined and the determined character appears. On the other hand, when the number of times over-winning occurs is an even count of 2, 4, or 6 times, the fixed effect for causing the character corresponding to the number of times over-winning to occur is executed. . As a result, depending on whether the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, 7 times or an even count of 2, 4, 6 times, different enjoyment can be given to the over-winning effect. it can. That is, when the number of times over-winning occurs is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, 1, 3, 5, while recognizing how many times over-winning occurs due to the appearance of the character. , And the odd count of 7 times, it is possible to give the enjoyment of paying attention to which one of the characters A to E appears.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of over-winnings is 1 count. As a result, during one round game, the over-winning effect is not executed twice, and the over-winning effect is easily recognized for each round game in which the over-winning occurs. Further, for example, when two over-winnings occur, if the number of times the over-winnings occur is 2, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are not executed in order (for example, overrun during a round game after the lottery effect). Even if the player wins the prize, the lottery effect is executed, and the lottery effect continues. Therefore, the effect that the player is looking forward to may not be executed, but in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented. it can.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when executing the big hit game will be described with reference to FIG. 151.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), during the execution of the big hit game, as a round effect using the effect display device 1600, the number of rounds of the round game being executed, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big prize. The effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls (total payout number) for winning in the mouth 2006 is executed. The display of the total number of wins is based on the fact that the game ball B has won the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, and the number of wins (payout) according to the winning number is updated (additional display) Unlike the above-mentioned over-winning effect, even if two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of wins according to each winning number ( The number of payouts will be added to reflect all. That is, when two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of executions of the over-winning effect is limited, but the update of the total acquisition number display is not limited.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), when an over-winning occurs during each round game, an over-winning effect is started as an effect using the effect display device 1600, and first, the effect display device 1600. From the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 provided at the lower right of the, the effect display as if light is gathering is executed toward the central portion of the effect display device 1600. As a result, when the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number is won in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, that is, when an over-winning occurs, the player easily notices that fact, and thereafter. The character appearing in can be paid attention to.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), in the over-winning effect, a character corresponding to the number of times the above-mentioned over-winning occurs is caused to appear. Specifically, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, the lottery effect for causing any of the characters A to E to appear is executed, while the over-winning effect is performed. When the number of times the prize is won is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, a fixed effect is performed to cause a character corresponding to the number of times the over-win is generated to appear. Further, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is the eighth or later count, a premier fixed production in which all the characters A to H appear is executed.

  Further, in the above-mentioned over-winning effect, a character corresponding to the number of times the over-winning is generated is made to appear by using the effect display device 1600, but the next round game when the over-winning occurs during the round game is performed. At the time of starting, the over-winning effect is finished and the appearing character is erased. Then, at the start of the round game, the round effect corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game is restarted so that the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are not missed. . In this example of performance, when the over-winning occurs during the round game, the over-winning effect is finished at the time of starting the next round game, but a predetermined time (for example, from the time when the over-winning occurs) 4-5 seconds), the over-winning effect is executed, and even when the next round game is started after the over-winning occurs, the over-winning effect is continued until a predetermined time elapses. You can In such a case, the over-winning effect is always executed for a predetermined time due to the occurrence of the over-winning, so that the over-winning effect can be leisurely enjoyed.

  The above-described over-winning effect is to be performed when the number of game balls B (over-winning) exceeds the specified number at the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. However, when an over-winning occurs in the first big winning opening 2005 having a specific area inside, no effect is produced at the time of over-winning, and an over-winning occurs only when an over-winning occurs in the second large winning opening 2006. You may make it perform time production. In the present embodiment, when the first special winning opening 2005 is passed through the specific area, the big hit determination effect is shown to indicate that the execution of the big hit game is fixed. However, according to the above-described configuration, the specific area to be passed is specified. It is possible to prevent the execution of the jackpot finalizing effect from being hindered by the accidental occurrence of the over-winning at the game timing.

  Further, in addition to the above-described configuration in which the effect at the time of over-winning can be executed, during the jackpot game, the lower right flock winning opening provided near the second big winning opening 2006 (for example, the lower right of the effect display device 1600). When a game ball is won in the general prize hole 2001) provided in, the bonus effect indicating that the bonus ball different from the prize ball for winning the game ball in the second major prize hole 2006 is provided is performed. May be. In such a case, it is possible to exemplify a control so as to suppress the execution of one of the over-winning effects and the bonus effect so as to prevent overlapping. For example, when a game ball wins in the lower right flock winning slot during execution of the over-winning effect, execution of bonus effect is suppressed, while when over-winning occurs during execution of bonus effect, It is possible to exemplify that the effect being executed is prioritized, such as suppressing the execution of the effect at the time of over-winning. However, regardless of whether the execution conditions for the over-winning effect and the bonus effect are satisfied, the award balls are paid out, and the total number of award balls acquired in the round effect using the effect display device 1600 (total payout number). Will be added to the display.

  As described above, when the over-winning effect is not executed even when the over-winning occurs, the number of times the over-winning occurs is not counted. As a result, when the over-winning effect is executed next, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are executed in order with respect to the already-executed over-winning effect, which gives the player a feeling of strangeness. Can be prevented.

  In the above, when the over-winning occurs during execution of the bonus effect, execution of the over-winning effect is suppressed, but only when the number of times the over-winning occurs is the eighth or later count, It may be replaced with an over-winning performance (premium fixed performance). In this way, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is the count after the eighth time, the number of times the over-winning occurs is after the eighth time by surely executing the premiere effect as the over-winning effect. However, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of loss that the premier effect cannot be seen.

[13. Modified example of light emitting display of light guide plate]
Next, a modified example of the light emitting display on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example, a plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are provided in the first LED group 2630a and the second LED group 2630b in response to the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 being pressed. , The third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d emit light in this order to emit light in the order of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d, and the center of the front light guide plate 2610. The animation-like illuminating effect with a movement that spreads from the outside to the outside is performed.

  Specifically, as variable display of the decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600, the decorative patterns in the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol (“7” in this example), and the reach state is formed. The decorative pattern is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600, and the first LED group 2630a of the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light as a reach effect or the like in the light guide plate body 2611. By causing light to enter from one specific light incident part 2612a, the first pattern 2614a that surrounds the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light, and the effect display device can be seen through the portion surrounded by the first pattern 2614a. “Press the button!” Is displayed on 1600 (FIG. 152 (A)).

  When the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), the decorative design in the left column is reduced and displayed in the lower left part of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative design in the right column is displayed. While displaying the reduced image in the lower right part of the device 1600, after displaying the decorative pattern in the middle row in the center of the effect display device 1600 so as to be visible through the portion surrounded by the first pattern 2614a, the decorative pattern in the middle row is left. The display is temporarily stopped and displayed with a design (“6” in this example) different from the decorative design in the row and the right column (FIG. 152 (B)).

  Then, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are caused to emit light in the order of the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, and the second specific light entering into the light guide plate body 2611. The second pattern 2614b (FIG. 152 (B)), the third pattern 2614c (FIG. 152 (C)), by entering light from the part 2612b, the third specific light incident part 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident part 2612d. The fourth pattern 2614d (FIG. 152 (D)) is caused to emit light in this order, and a light-emitting effect such as a moving animation that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is performed.

  In addition, in the front production unit 2600 of this example, a reflector (not shown) attached to a part of the right side of the front light guide plate 2610 and a right face of the front light guide plate 2610 attached to the upper surface of the reflector. A front light guide plate decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs 2660 for irradiating light are mounted, and light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 2660 provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660 is condensed to increase light intensity. And a light collecting member 2670. In addition, on the back surface of the light guide plate body 2611, a plurality of fine reflection concave portions 2616 that reflect the light incident from the plurality of LEDs 2660 forward are formed.

  Then, by causing the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 to emit light in the order of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, the first pattern 2614a. , The second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are emitted in this order, and a light-emitting effect such as a moving animation that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is repeated several times (1 After that, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 may be replaced with the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group. Any one of 2630d is stopped in a light emitting state, and a plurality of LEDs 2660 are caused to emit light so that light is incident from the upper right side of the light guide plate body 2611 into the light guide plate body 2611. The decorative pattern in the middle row, which is visible through the center of the fourth pattern 2614d), is emitted while the decorative pattern 2615 in the middle row is emitted, and the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked by being penetrated by the protruding pattern 2615. This mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 152 (D)). At this time, in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 2660, an arrow of light is emitted toward the center of the front light guide plate 2610 on the effect display device 1600 located on the back of the light guide plate body 2611 to shoot through the center of the pattern 2614. Such an effect display is performed, and then this image is disappeared to assist the auxiliary shot pattern 2615 (auxiliary display).

  Specifically, the back of the shot-out pattern 2615 (at least a part of the back-side of the shot-out pattern 2615 is included so that the light gradually goes away from the vicinity of the plurality of LEDs 2660, and the area other than the back side of the shot-out pattern 2615 is included. Image may be gradually displayed to complete the image overlapping the shot-out picture 2615, and then the arrows of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 are caused to disappear by the disappearance of this picture. The picture 2614 (first picture 2614a). ~ The fourth pattern 2614d) is shot through the center so that the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are spread in this order from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 to the outside. It is designed to perform an effect such as a flashing animation in which the light emitting effect is stopped.

  Further, the shot-out pattern 2615 includes a portion displayed on the upper layer and a portion displayed on the lower layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). Specifically, on the surface side of the design 2614 (first design 2614a to fourth design 2614d) on the front side of the portion of the shot-out design 2615 stuck in the design 2614 (first design 2614a to fourth design 2614d). The part indicating that there is a right part (the right part of the blank pattern 2615 which is divided into right and left) is displayed in the upper layer with respect to the design 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d), and the blank pattern is displayed. A part of 2615 which is stuck to the design 2614 (first design 2614a to fourth design 2614d) and is on the back side of the design 2614 (first design 2614a to fourth design 2614d) (divided into left and right and displayed. Regarding the left side portion of the shot pattern 2615 to be displayed, it is displayed in the lower layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). Thereby, the perspective based on the design 2614 (first design 2614a to fourth design 2614d) can be expressed, and the arrows of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 are design 2614 (first design 2614a to fourth design 2614d). It is possible to realistically express the appearance of shooting through the center of.

  In addition, as described above, a light collecting member 2670 is provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660 that emit the shot-out pattern 2615, and collects these lights to enter the light guide plate body 2611 in a state where the light intensity is increased. Let On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are not provided with the light collecting member 2670, and these lights are diffused and enter the light guide plate body 2611. Therefore, the shot-out pattern 2615 can be made to emit light with light stronger than the patterns 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) emitted by the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640. However, the projected pattern 2615 is designed such that the light thereof gradually weakens as the distance from the plurality of LEDs 2660 increases (as the reflection concave portions 2616 of the light guide plate body 2611 move away from the plurality of LEDs 2660, the light is emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660. By gradually reducing the ratio of light reflected forward, the light visually recognizable from the front of the light guide plate body 2611 is gradually weakened), and the sense of perspective is also expressed by the light emission of the shot-out pattern 2615.

  Further, as a result of the variable display, when a big hit occurs, the light guide plate body 2611 is caused to emit the blank pattern 2615 to display a mode in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked on the effect display device 1600, and then the left row. And the decorative pattern in the middle row that is once stopped and displayed with a design different from the decorative pattern in the right column (“6” in this example) is broken (destroyed) to become the same as the decorative pattern in the left and right columns. The jackpot pattern is changed and fixedly displayed (FIG. 153 (F)). On the other hand, as a result of the variable display, if there is a loss, the light guide plate body 2611 is caused to emit the blank pattern 2615, and the mode in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the left row. With the decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern in the right column (“6” in this example), the decorative pattern in the middle row is not broken (without being destroyed) and the decorative pattern in the left column and the right column Is maintained with a different symbol and the lost symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed (FIG. 153 (E)).

  Note that the decorative design is not limited to the fixed stop display, and when the reach effect is developed into a super reach effect, for example, the decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern in the left column and the right column in FIG. 152D is temporarily stopped and displayed. Even when the decorative pattern in the middle row is destroyed and then developed into a super reach effect, the above effect can be executed. In the case where the above-described production is executed as the reach production, the shot-out pattern 2615 is caused to emit light in the case of a big hit or when the reach production is developed into a super reach production or the like. In the case of deriving a lost design without developing into a pattern, the first design 2614a, the second design 2614b, the third design 2614c, and the fourth design 2614d of the front light guide plate 2610 are emitted in this order without causing the blank design 2615 to emit light. It is also possible to stop the light emission effect such as an animation having a motion that spreads from the center to the outside, and then stop and display the lost symbol. Further, there is a movement such that the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are spread in this order from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 to the outside without causing the shot-out pattern 2615 to emit light. It is also possible to stop the light emitting effect such as animation and then emit the blanking pattern 2615 to derive the big hit symbol or execute the reverse effect for developing the reach effect to the super reach effect or the like.

  As described above, in the light emitting display of the light guide plate of the modified example, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) and a blank pattern 2615. Although the pattern is made to emit light to the same light guide plate (front light guide plate 2610), a sense of perspective can be realistically expressed, so that the player can be surprised or surprised, and a decrease in the entertainment level of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the central ornamental body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the retracted position which is raised near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a. In addition, the pair of first projecting decorative portion 3352a and second projecting decorative portion 3353a of each of the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are two on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, respectively. They are located at the first position where they overlap each other in the front and back. Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the front side of the central decorative body 3351. From this, the central ornamental body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the first protruding ornamental portion 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a are provided one on each of the left and right sides of the central ornamental body 3351. The central decorating body 3351 and the two first projecting decorating parts 3352a and the second projecting decorating part 3353a are used to decorate the inside of the game area 5a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In a normal state, since the two first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3353a located at the first position overlap in the front-rear direction, the first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projections on the front side. Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (on the side of the player), it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the rear side and the central decorative body 3351. It is possible to recognize that the first protruding decoration portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a are presently visible. In a normal state, when the LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first projecting decorative section decorative board and the second projecting decorative section decorative board emit light, the central decorative body 3351, the first projecting decorative section 3352a and the Since the second projecting decoration part 3353a can be decorated with light emission, the central projecting body 3351, the first projecting decoration part 3352a, and the second projecting decoration part 3353a allow the central projecting body 3351, the first projecting decoration part 3352a, and the second projecting decoration part 3352a. The part 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Further, in a normal state, the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protruding decoration bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353 are in the withdrawal position near the upper edge of the front view game area 5a, so that the front view game is performed. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351, and is in a good state from the player side. The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can entertain the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the downward appearance position. Then, the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protruding decoration bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353 descend together. At this time, on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 to the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353, on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the remaining first protruding decorative body 3352, The lower ends of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are respectively attached, and the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 are respectively attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable within a predetermined range. Since it is attached to the tip of the first link rod 3303, it is attached to the unit bases 3301 so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the central ornamental body 3351. Therefore, it is lowered together with the central ornamental body 3351. The two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decorations 3353 (the first projecting decoration 3352a and the second projecting decoration 3353a) cause the left and right second link rods 3304 to move in the same direction as that of the central decoration 3351. It is pulled downward, and the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 slides downward with respect to the unit base 3301. The upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 can be slid vertically by the first link rods 3303 within a range shorter than the moving distance (elevation distance) of the central ornamental body 3351. Before 3351 reaches the appearance position of the descending end, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 reach the lower ends in the sliding direction. Then, after the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end portion in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 further moves in the direction of the lower appearance position, the lower end portion of the second link rod 3304 further appears at the appearance position. Of the right side of the two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decorations 3353 that are going to descend together with the central decorative body 3351 by the left and right second link bars 3304 because they cannot move in the direction (downward). The first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the left second projecting decorative portion 3353a are pulled toward the upper unit base 3301 side, and this force causes the two first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 to be center-decorated. Due to the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b attached to the rear side of the body 3351, they rotate in different directions with respect to the axis extending in the front-back direction about the center of the central ornamental body 3351, and on both left and right sides. The first projecting decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a move from the first position overlapping front and back to the second position in which the front and rear overlapping is eliminated. As a result, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a, which have been seen as one on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, are rotated so as to form two fans and the central decorative body 3351. One large decoration can be formed by the four first projecting decoration parts 3352a and the second projecting decoration parts 3353a radially extending around the central decoration body 3351 to be shown to the player. Therefore, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 moved to the center of the game area 5a. By increasing the number of the projecting decorative portions 3353a, the player's surprise can be projected, and by spreading the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a around the central decorative body 3351, the overall decoration It is possible to increase the player's interest rate and give a strong impact to the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position at the rising end to the appearance position at the falling end by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 move toward the lower end in the sliding direction. The two first projecting decoration parts 3352a and the second projecting decoration parts 3353a on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are overlapped with each other until reaching the (downward end of the tip of the first link rod 3303). In the state of the first position, the central decoration body 3351 descends together with the central decoration body 3351, and after the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end portion in the sliding direction, the central decoration body 3351 moves in the direction of the appearance position (downward). ), The two left and right first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3353a are rotationally moved from the first position where they overlap each other to a second position where the overlap is eliminated, and radially around the central decoration body 3351. Since the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be shown to the player as a movable effect that moves in two steps, the upper front drive motor 3302 It is possible to stop the movement (production) in the first stage or move (production) to the second stage by appropriately controlling the control of the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protruding decoration bodies 3352. Also, it is possible to increase the variation of the movable effect using the second projecting decorative body 3353, entertain the player with various effects, and make the player less likely to get tired of playing. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in

  In addition, according to the game state, the upper front drive motor 3302 can move the central decoration body 3351 from the retracted position at the rising end to the appearance position at the descending end, so that the central decoration body 3351 is in the normal position at the retracted position, When the gaming state changes, the player can be excited and excitement depending on whether or not the central ornamental body 3351 descends to the appearance position, which can entertain the player. Then, by lowering the central decoration body 3351 from the retracted position to the appearance position side by the upper front drive motor 3302 and moving it to the first stage where the first protruding decoration body 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353 do not rotate, Since the decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 move downward in the normal state, it seems that there is something good for the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game. Further, when the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered to the second stage, that is, when the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the descending end, four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and second protruding ornamental portions 3353a are radially spread around the central ornamental body 3351. Then, a large decoration can be shown to the player with the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a, and the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and The descending second projecting decoration portion 3353a can make the player feel as if he / she was being given a bulletin board from above, so that the player has an advantage in the advantageous game state. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  As described above, when the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movements of the central ornamental body 3351 and the two first protruding ornamental bodies 3352 and the second protruding ornamental body 3353 can be changed in two steps. Therefore, for the player, there is a different possibility (expected value) of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage when stopped in the first stage and when stopped in the second stage. It is possible to recognize that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and the central decoration body 3351 and the two first projecting decoration bodies 3352 and the second projecting decoration body can be made. With the body 3353, various expected values can be displayed to the player.

  Further, the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area 5a, and the central ornamental body 3351 descends to the appearance position to secure a space around the central ornamental body 3351. Since it becomes easier, the four first protruding decoration portions 3352a and the second protruding decoration portions 3353a can be moved from the first position to the second position and radially expanded around the central decoration body 3351 at the appearance position. The body 3351 and the two first projecting decoration bodies 3352 and the second projecting decoration body 3353 can form a decoration as large as possible. Therefore, when the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the game state, the central ornamental body 3351 and four first protrusions radially spread around the central ornamental body 3351 near the center of the game area 5a. The player can be surprised because a large decoration by the decoration portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. In addition, it is possible to enjoy a large decoration by the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the central decoration body 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first protruding decoration portions 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decoration body 3351 are positioned at the first position. To the second position, and the one upper front drive motor 3302 moves the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protruding decoration bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353, When performing an effect (movable effect) using the central ornament 3351 and the two first protrusion ornaments 3352 and the second protrusion ornament 3353, it is sufficient to control only one upper front drive motor 3302. Such a load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing the effect using the central ornamental body 3351 and the two first protruding ornamental bodies 3352 and the second protruding ornamental body 3353, it is possible to perform the effect using other movable ornamental bodies or light emitting ornamental bodies at the same time. Also, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the control of the effect, the control of the effect becomes unstable due to the overload, so that the upper front drive motor 3302 causes the central ornamental body 3351 and the two first protruding ornamental bodies 3352. And, it is possible to prevent the movement of the second projecting decoration 3353 from being jerky, and surely exhibit the effect of using the central projecting body 3351 and the two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353. The pachinko machine 1 can achieve the above-described effects.

  In addition, as described above, from the middle of the central decorative body 3351 descending to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since it is moved, the speed at which the first protruding decoration portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a move (rotate) to the second position becomes relatively faster than the moving speed of the central decoration body 3351. Therefore, the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a can be moved so as to suddenly spread around the central decorative body 3351, which surprises the player and causes the central decorative body 3351 and the second decorative portion 3351 to move. It is possible to entertain the effect using the first projecting ornament 3352 and the second projecting ornament 3353.

  Further, as described above, after the central ornamental body 3351 has moved from the retracted position to the appearance position to some extent, the first protruding ornamental portion 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a on both the left and right sides of the central ornamental body 3351 are first removed. It is designed to be moved from the position to the second position. That is, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a are moved from the vicinity of the upper edge of the front view game area 5a toward the center to some extent, and then the first projecting decorative portion 3352a is radially spread around the central decorative body 3351. Since it moves from the position to the second position, when the four first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3353a move to the second position, the first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations It is possible to make it difficult for the portion 3353a to come into contact with other members, and prevent damage to the first projecting decorative portion 3352a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a, and other members.

  In addition, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front center decorative board, the first projecting decorative section decorative board, and the second projecting decorative section decorative board are made to emit light, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first projecting decorative sections 3352a and Since the second projecting decorative portions 3353a can be independently illuminated and decorated, the central decorating body 3351 and the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be light-emitted and decorated. The decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, before lowering the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 by the upper front drive motor 3302 from the retracted position to the appearance position, the upper front central decorative substrate and the first protruding decorative body By illuminating and decorating the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the partial decorative substrate and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, Since the central ornamental body 3351 and the like can be focused on, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the central front ornamental motor 3302 moves the central ornamental body 3351 and the like to the appearance position. I can do it. Then, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position on the center side of the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, and four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative portions 3353a are radially arranged around the central decorative body 3351. If it spreads to, the player can be surprised to think that something good will happen, and the player's expectation for the game can be increased. When the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and the first protrusional ornamental portion decorative substrate and the first protrusional ornamental portion decorative substrate 3352a and When the two-protrusion decoration part 3353a is light-emitted, the player can see a large shining decoration in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player has an advantage in the advantageous game state (eg, "big hit game"). )) Is generated, the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front-view game area 5a, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the central appearance position in the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, Since the effect image (a part of) is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352, and the second projecting decorative body 3353, the player can be made aware of the descent of the central decorative body 3351 and the like to be noticed. It is possible to show the four first projecting decoration parts 3352a and the second projecting decoration parts 3353a that move from the first position to the second position and spread radially around the central decoration body 3351. Therefore, in the center of the game area 5a, a large decoration by the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a can be surely shown to the player, and the above-mentioned operational effect The pachinko machine 1 that reliably plays can be obtained.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the game ball B is in the area excluding the frame of the center accessory 2500. You can play games that are distributed by. A front production unit 2600 having a transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame, and the rear effect unit is arranged through the front light guide plate 2610. The effect image displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed. In this state, a predetermined LED 2630 of a plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted via a reflector 2620 on the upper peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 according to the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a. When any one of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d is caused to emit light, the identification on the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610 corresponding to the LED 2630 is performed. The light incident portion 2612 (any one of the first specific light incident portion 2612a, the second specific light incident portion 2612b, the third specific light incident portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d) is irradiated with light, and the specific incident light is emitted. The corresponding pattern 2614 (any one of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d) is displayed by the light incident from the light section 2612 into the front light guide plate 2610. The Rukoto. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, and from the plurality of through holes 2622 penetrating the fixed recessed portion 2621 to the specific light incident portion 2612 side. Since the plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 via the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 so as to face, the LED 2630 can be brought as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light entrance portion 2612) of the light guide plate body 2611. Therefore, the light from the LED 2630 can be surely applied to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, and the light from the LED 2630 can be prevented from diffusing by the through hole 2622, so that the specific light incident which is not supported can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the portion 2612 from being irradiated with light.

  Then, the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate body 2611 from the specific light incident part 2612 corresponds to the corresponding reflection recess 2613 (first reflection recess 2613a, second reflection recess 2613b, third reflection recess 2613c, fourth reflection recess 2613d). , Any of the light) is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflection concave portion 2613 extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, in the predetermined direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflection concave portion 2613. Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate body 2611 is included, the eyes of the player seated in front of the game area 5a (light guide plate body 2611) are reflected by the light guide plate body 2611 by the reflection recesses 2613. The light reflected or refracted in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the reflection concave portion 2613 reaches the reflection concave portion 2613, and the pattern 2614 formed by the reflection concave portion 2613 appears to be illuminated. On the other hand, the light that has entered the light guide plate body 2611 from the specific light incident portion 2612 reaches the reflection concave portion 2613 that does not correspond to the specific light incident portion 2612, but the reflection concave portion 2613 that does not correspond to the reflection concave portion 2613. Since the light extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the specific light incident portion 2612 on which the light is incident, the direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflection concave portion 2613 is the surface of the light guide plate body 2611. It becomes a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, does not reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and the reflection concave portions 2613 that do not correspond do not appear to shine. As described above, when the LED 2630 irradiates the specific light incident portion 2612 with light, only the reflection recess 2613 corresponding to the specific light incident portion 2612 reflects or refracts light in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate body 2611. By doing so, it reaches the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and it is possible to make the player see as if only the pattern 2614 composed of the corresponding reflective recess 2613 is illuminated. .

  Therefore, by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 that emits light and changing the specific light entering portion 2612 that is irradiated with light, it is possible to variously change the pattern 2614 that is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, and thus various patterns can be obtained. By displaying 2614 as a light emission, the player can be surprised and entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed so as to be related to each other in sequence, a plurality of LEDs 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group) depending on the game state. 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d) sequentially emit light, a plurality of patterns (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) are sequentially emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 for animation. The player can see the light-emitting display with movement as shown in.

  Specifically, the first design 2614a, the second design 2614b, the third design 2614c, and the fourth design 2614d are displayed in the order of light emission, and after the last fourth design 2614d, the first design 2614a is returned to the first design again. When the light emitting display is repeated in order from the above, the plurality of patterns 2614 on the front light guide plate 2610 can show the player the light emitting display which continues to move from the outside toward the center, and thus the game can be played by this continuous light emitting display. It is possible to make people feel that their momentum is concentrated, and to make them think that something good is happening, and to increase their expectations for the game. On the other hand, contrary to the above, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second pattern 2614b, and the first pattern 2614a are made to emit light in this order, and after the last first pattern 2614a, the first pattern 2614a returns to the first and again the second pattern. When the light emitting display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the player can show the light emitting display that keeps moving from the center toward the outside by the plurality of patterns of the light guide plate. It is possible to make the player illusion that the player is spreading from the center or the illusion that the player is moving forward, and it is possible to make the player feel that the gaming state is changing. In this way, since a moving light emitting display like animation can be shown to the player, the moving light emitting display by the front light guide plate 2610, which has never been seen in the past pachinko machine 1, is strong to the player. It is possible to give an impact, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage occurs, It is possible to raise expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front-view game area 5a, even if the design 2614 is caused to emit light by the LED 2630, it emits light. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, and the game becomes difficult to see. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good state.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where two members are attached. It is possible to eliminate rattling between the LED and the front light guide plate 2610 and reliably position the plurality of LEDs 2630 at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably emitted to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 is obtained. It is possible to reliably perform light emission display.

  Further, since the pattern 2614 is configured by the plurality of reflection concave portions 2613 extending in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the specific light incident portion 2612, the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 are formed in the light guide plate body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be disposed on a specific side (here, the upper side) of the peripheral edge, and by disposing the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611. It can be arranged only on the upper side of the light plate body 2611. As a result, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer circumference of the light guide plate body 2611, and a front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the effect image and the like, and to the player. While it is possible to entertain the effect image in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with an open feeling because there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a appealing power that can enhance the appearance of the game area 5a and strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, as described above, since a plurality of (here, four) patterns 2614 can be light-emitted and displayed on one front light guide plate 2610, there is no need to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the conventional case, and a plurality of light guide plates can be used. The front-back light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 while the front-back dimension of the pattern 2614 for light emission display can be made as small (thin) as possible. The positions can be set as close to each other as possible, and it is possible to easily secure a large space behind the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured behind the front light guide plate 2610, a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, an upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, which makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance in the game area 5a and having a high appealing power to the player, and in addition to the effect by the luminous display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing the movable effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be obtained by aligning the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light, the front light guide plate is displayed. It is possible to make a strong impact on a player who thought that 2610 does not exist and to be surprised, and to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a from being deteriorated by seeing the reflector 2620 and the like. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LEDs 2630 can be made less visible. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not predict, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and the game can be played. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the front light guide plate 2610 emits a plurality of different patterns 2614 to emit light, and the effect display device 1600 produces an effect image. Since it is possible to show the combined effect to the player, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and also to make the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by the effect of, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to add a sense of depth and a stereoscopic effect to the pattern 2614 that is being displayed by emitting light by displaying the effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2614 that are being displayed by emitting light on the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to show the player an effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5 having the game area 5a, an upper rear left decorative body 3220 in which decoration is formed on the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 which move in the vertical direction, An upper rear left decorative board 3240, an upper rear left decorative board 3220, and an upper rear left decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs for light emitting decoration of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are mounted are attached. Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and the force to move the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward due to gravity is large. In this state, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is transported or the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrates on the pachinko machine 1. When a force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is further applied, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240), respectively, the clutch mechanism 3250 is moved when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 try to descend. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the roller 3254 tries to rotate, the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is disposed between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. In the state of being caught, a force for rotating the housing case 3251 is applied by the plurality of rollers 3254. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251 are interposed. The frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force to rotate the 3251, so that the housing case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, the output is output according to the load of rotation from the output member 3253 side (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from freely descending. Therefore, the clutch mechanism 3250 can lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, so that the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are arbitrarily moved during transportation or installation. By moving to, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end to damage the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and other members, and In addition, the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be surely enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped at the manufacturing factory, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are shipped at the origin position, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the upper rear left. Since it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from freely moving, when the apparatus is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is performed. It is not necessary to perform the above, and the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 can be saved, and the burden on the installation can be reduced.

  Further, when installing or maintaining the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from the regular position (origin position) for some reason. In this case, when the operator tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the proper positions by hand, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is a tightening spring as a torque limiter. By tightening with 3255, the rotation on the output side is locked according to the load of rotation to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving. Applying a stronger force to the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 in order to move the upper case 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (rotate the case 3251 through the plurality of rollers 3254). When the force to be larger than the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, a slip occurs between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 against the frictional resistance. The housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates together with the housing case 3251 and the lock is released, and the rotation of the output member 3253 causes the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the input member 3252 to rotate. Since it is transmitted to the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side, a strong force acting on the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 side is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220, the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the clutch mechanism 3250 and the like from being damaged.

  Also, depending on the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear left unit 3210 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, its rotation is transmitted through the clutch mechanism 3250, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 move to the front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are respectively moved down from the upper part inside, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and The descending (appearing) of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can surprise the player, and let the player pay attention to the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear. It is possible that the movement and decoration of the right decorative body 3240 can be enjoyed, and there is something good for the player by lowering the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240), respectively. Therefore, vibration from the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, other movable ornaments, etc., left slider 3212 and right slider 3232, upper rear left ornament 3220, upper rear right ornament 3240, upper part Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attempting to descend due to gravity or the like acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253. The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the above, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. The force to rotate it acts. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251 are interposed. The frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force to rotate the 3251, so that the housing case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, the output is output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (the upper rear left decoration body 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from freely descending, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the left rear slider 3212 can be controlled via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from making an unexpected movement (fall), and the player feels distrust by the unintended movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and suppress the deterioration of interest.

  Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at a position of any height through the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that stop moving up and down at a position, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and a decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be made.

  Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left The drive motor 3214 and the upper right rear drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being overloaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being damaged early due to overload, and at the same time, the upper portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of urging the protrusions 3252a side close to each other, when a force for rotating the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately pressed. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is activated after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. The rotation of the output member 3253 until this time can be reduced as much as possible. Accordingly, when the left rear slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can smoothly descend without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and entertains the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple structure using the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, the plurality of rollers 3254, etc., the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided with two planetary gear mechanisms. Since it is possible to easily downsize the whole as compared with the above, by downsizing the clutch mechanism 3250, a space for arranging the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or another member) is provided. It is possible to make it easy to secure, and it is possible to make the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 relatively large and conspicuous, and by the large upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by strongly attracting the player's interest.

  Furthermore, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 each including the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 are provided according to the game state. By appropriately raising and lowering the upper rear right ornamental body 3240 via the respective left slider 3212 and right slider 3232, a game in which various upper and lower left ornamental body 3220 and upper rear right ornamental body 3240 are movable in various patterns is played. It is possible to show the game to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. At this time, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper right right unit 3230 respectively include the clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, respectively. Smoothly move, it is possible to entertain the player with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In addition, when the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the game state, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 By bringing the rear right decorative bodies 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, and thus a large decorative body appears. By doing so, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous to the player due to the appearance of a large ornament (for example, " It is possible to think that a big hit game ”) will occur, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and united with each other, the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by contacting each other. However, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided for each of them, as described above, the force for moving the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 (from the output side). Even if a force to rotate the roller 3254 is applied, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to the contact between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is also possible to prevent the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning, and to surely entertain the player with a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other to reduce the excitement. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be illuminated and decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board to emit light according to the game state. Therefore, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention, and the decoration and movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be enhanced. And the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are decorated to emit light, which makes it possible for the player to think that something is good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress a decline in interest. Also, by providing the upper rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the weight of the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increases, and the gravity and inertial force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increase. Also, as described above, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, which can be light-emitted by the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board, can be prevented from moving unintentionally. It is possible to cause the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to make a desired motion with a high effect of effect, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, since the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256, the output member is output from the output side. By rotating 3253, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 presses the roller 3254 against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 so that the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force to rotate the housing case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) to rotate the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. If it is larger than this, slippage occurs between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the housing case 3251 rotates. Then, as the housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that is tightening the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be released by being transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper right rear drive motor 3234 side, the roller 3254 cannot be unlocked by being strongly bitten, or the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration. It is possible to prevent the body 3240, the output member 3253, and the housing case 3251 from being damaged, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described operational effects.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, in the front view game area 5a, the lower center lifting base 3121 and the lower left side lifting bases 3151 and the lower right side on both left and right sides of the lower center lifting base 3121. After lowering the elevating bases 3171 respectively, the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornaments are attached by sliders (sliding mechanism) attached to the respective lower left side elevating bases 3151 and lower right side elevating bases 3171. 3173 is slid to the outside in the left-right direction, and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation section 301 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a is retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 can be seen in the center of the front-view game area 5a, and the lower front central ornamental body 3111 (lower rear central ornament) in the left-right center in the lower portion of the game area 5a. The body 3122) and the four rotary ornaments 3126 arranged in the left-right direction of the central movable unit 3125 attached to the top of the body are visible, and the left and right ends of the row of the four rotary ornaments 3126 are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The left side rotary decoration 3153 and the right side rotary decoration 3173 of the lower left side effect unit 3150 and the lower right side effect unit 3170, respectively, and the left sub side rotary decorative element 3155 and the right sub side rotary decorative element 3175 can be seen above them. Further, an annular rotation operation section 302 and a pressing operation section 303 arranged in the ring can be seen as a production operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a. ing.

  In this state, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a (the first special lottery result or the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004). (Depending on the result of the special lottery), the four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central ornamental body 3111 rotate, or the four rotating ornamental bodies arranged side by side by the lower central elevating base 3121. 3126 rises together with the lower rear central decoration 3122, the four rotating ornaments 3126 lifted by the lower central lifting base 3121 rotate, the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right side of the lower left side effect unit 3150. By the lower right slide drive motor or the like (sliding mechanism) of the rendering unit 3170, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173 slides in the left-right direction, or the left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations. Three rotating ornaments 3126 and left, where the 3173 rotates, and the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173 are raised by the slide mechanism and the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower right side elevation base 3171. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are lined up in the left-right direction, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 rotate. Therefore, let the player pay attention to the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating ornaments 3126), the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right subside rotating ornament 3175, and the like. In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to entertain the movable production by them.

  Further, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 is caused to emit light and the lower front central ornamental body 3111 is caused to emit light to display a downward arrow, or the lower central elevating center is elevated. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light by the plurality of LEDs of the lower central decoration substrate, a large downward arrow is luminescently displayed, and a pair of lower left side elevations By elevating the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to cause the respective lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. It is possible to entertain the player also by the effect, and it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to the effect operation unit 301 below by the downward arrow that is light-emitted and displayed, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is performed for the player. Can be encouraged. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302, or the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, thereby participating in the player participation type effect. And can be entertained.

  Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation type effects as described above can be performed, by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects. , It is possible to make the player less tired and to make it difficult for the player to predict the effect pattern, so that it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected effect. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, four rotary ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and right side rotary ornaments 3173, and a pair of left subside rotary ornaments 3155 and right subside rotary ornaments 3175 are respectively extended in the left-right direction. Each of them is designed to rotate independently around the axis, and four decorative portions 3127, 3154, and 3156 which are different from each other in the circumferential direction are provided. Therefore, when they are rotated, the player side is changed. The facing surface (decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156) can be changed, and the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a can be variously changed to entertain the player. Further, when the four rotation decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotation decorations 3153 and the right side rotation decorations 3173, and the pair of the left subside rotation decorations 3155 and the right subside rotation decorations 3175 are stopped to rotate, Various messages are displayed as decorations to the player by stopping the rotation of the decorations 3127, decorations 3154, and decorations 3156 facing the player so that the combination becomes a predetermined combination. Since it can be presented, the combination of the decorative portions 3127, the decorative portions 3154, and the decorative portions 3156 that are not rotating may cause an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a “big hit game”). By displaying the (expected value), each of the four rotary ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and right side rotary ornaments 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotary ornaments depending on the game state. By rotating the 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the rotation is stopped by the combination of the decoration portion 3127, the decoration portion 3154, and the decoration portion 3156 having a higher expected value. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the lower rear central decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a that are arranged in a row in the vertical direction and can emit light independently of each other, if a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a are made to emit light at the same time, one A downward arrow can be displayed by light emission, and if light emission is sequentially performed from a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a, the player's line of sight is directed to the lower performance operation unit 301 by light emission flowing from top to bottom. It is possible to make it easy to guide the player, and it is possible to further encourage the operation of the effect operation unit 301 to surely allow the player to operate the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 302 having an annular shape as the effect operation unit 301 and the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring are provided, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed for the player. Since the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be performed, the patterns of the player participation type effect can be diversified by appropriately combining the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the pressing operation portion 303 is arranged inside the ring-shaped rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 is surrounded by the rotation operation portion 302, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 should be increased. The large rotation operation section 302 can strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, as described above, when the player's line of sight is guided downward by the light emission display of the downward arrow by the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 and the lower front central ornamental body 3111, the rotation operation unit 302 (pressing operation unit 303 ) Can be easily noticed, it is possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and entertain the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the pressing operation portion 303 is arranged inside the ring of the annular rotation operation portion 302, as described above, the downward arrow light emission display by the lower rear central decoration body 3122 or the lower front central decoration body 3111 is performed. When the player looks at the lower part of the arrow, the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 that are rotating can be seen, so that there is a possibility that an advantageous game state is generated for the player due to the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302. Can be recognized at the same time, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be strongly urged, the pressing operation unit 303 can be surely pressed, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the person.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit 303 can be in a lowered state and a state protruding upward, the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen greatly in the protruding state of the pressing operation unit 303, so that a game is played. It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. On the other hand, since the pressing operation unit 303 is inconspicuous when the pressing operation unit 303 is descending, it is possible to make the player think that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is low, and the pressing operation unit 303 Depending on the advancing / retreating position, the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous game state may be suggested to the player.

  In addition, the forward / backward position of the pressing operation unit 303 can indicate to the player the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous game state, and thus, as described above, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front When the downward arrow is lit by the central ornamental body 3111 or the like, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is projected, which increases the player's expectation and the pressing operation. The operation of pressing the portion 303 can be enjoyed, the player is less likely to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image in the center of the front-view game area 5a is provided, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is used. Also, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a behind the lower movable effect unit 3100, the lower center elevating base 3121 is used together with the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 in accordance with the game state. The four rotating decorations 3126 are raised, and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 together with the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172, the left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration. When the body 3173 is raised, a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotation decorations 3126, the left side rotation decoration 3153, the right side rotation decoration 3173, and the like. Since it is possible to make the player notice the rise of the four rotation decorations 3126, the left side rotation decoration 3153, the right side rotation decoration 3173, etc., the player can be sure to show the effect using them. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect image can be displayed in the center of the front-view game area 5a, as described above, the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side. When the downward arrow is displayed by the decorative body 3172 or the like to emit light and the player is prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301 below, an effect image or effect operation unit that prompts the effect display device 1600 to operate the effect operation unit 301. By displaying an effect image explaining the operation of 301, an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage and the effect operation unit 301, and the like, the effect operation unit 301 for the player It is possible to strongly encourage participation in the player-participating type production that operates the, and it is possible to facilitate the operation of the production operation unit 301, and it is possible to entertain the player-participating type production and suppress a decrease in interest. ..

  Further, as described above, since various combinations of effects can be shown to the player, for example, the lower central lifting base 3121, the lower left side lifting base 3151, and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are lowered. From the state, when the left and right left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173 are moved to the center in the left-right direction by a slide mechanism such as a lower left slide driving motor and a lower right slide driving motor, the four side-by-side arrangements are made. The left side rotary ornament 3153 and the right side rotary ornament 3173 are located on the left and right sides of the row of the one rotary ornament 3126, and four rotary ornaments 3126 and a pair of the left side rotary ornament 3153 and the right side rotary ornament are included. Since the body 3173 and the body 3173 are arranged side by side, the player can be surprised and the player can be entertained. In this state, the lower central elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 raise the four rotating decorations 3126 and the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173. And four rotation decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotation decorations 3153 and right side rotation decorations 3173, and a pair of left subside rotation decorations 3155 and right subside rotation decorations 3175 arranged in a row in the left-right direction. In this state, the player can see a large horizontal decoration that crosses the inside of the game area 5a, which gives a strong impact to the player, and I think there is something good about it. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game. Then, the four rotating decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173, and the pair of the left subside rotating decorations 3155 and the right subside rotating decorations 3175 are appropriately combined to the left and right. When the rotation is stopped after rotating them in a lined state, the combination of each decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156 will make the player feel irritated depending on whether or not the combination is stopped in a desired combination. It is possible to enjoy the rotation (moving effect) of the four rotating decoration bodies 3126 and the like, and when the decoration portions 3127 and the like are stopped in a desired combination, the advantageous game state for the player. It is possible to be confident that the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be increased, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and suppress a decrease in interest. After that, the lower rear central decoration 3122 (lower front central decoration 3111), the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are caused to emit a downward arrow so that the player's line of sight is directed downward. The player can be guided to the section 301, and the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation section 301. At this time, since it is possible to suggest the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state by the size of the downward arrow displayed in the light emission, if the arrow displayed in the light emission is small, it continues to the player. It is possible to think that it can be recovered by the operation of the production operation unit 301, and it is possible to be convinced that the advantageous gaming state occurs when the arrow that is light-emitted and displayed is small. Therefore, in any case, the expectation for the game is increased. It is possible to entertain the subsequent operation of the effect operation unit 301 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the movable effect unit, the rotating decorative body 3126, which is rotatable about the axis extending in the left and right and in which a plurality of (four) decorative portions 3127 different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed, is used as the movable direction unit. Although it is shown that four coaxially provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rotating decorative body that is rotatable around an axis extending vertically and has a plurality of decorative portions different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed. It may be provided with at least one, provided with at least one rotating ornament that can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, provided with at least one movable ornament that slides in the left-right direction, and the like. ..

  In the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that move up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between the drive motor and a movable decorative body that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decorative body that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the roller 3254. However, the clutch mechanism 3250 is not limited to this. And a speed conversion unit that shifts the reduced rotation and transmits the reduced rotation to the output side. The reduction unit is connected to the drive motor side of the first sun gear, the first planetary gear, and the rotation. And a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear connected to the first sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable rotating ring gear. A carrier provided with support shafts for supporting the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism on both sides is arranged between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, and a ring is provided in the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism. A difference in the number of teeth may be provided between at least one of the gear and the sun gear so that the rotation from the drive motor is decelerated and transmitted to the rotating ring gear.

[14. Stock time production]
The stock time effect implemented in the present embodiment will be described below.
[14-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described. FIG. 154 is a table showing an example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also referred to as special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as special figure 2. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are generically referred to as a special symbol variation, or simply a variation. The special lottery results in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 include a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot of Toku-zu 1 includes "2R time saving no symbol 1" and "6R time shortening symbol 1".

  In addition, the small hit in special figure 1 includes "7R time shortened symbol design 1" and "7R time shortened symbol pattern 2". Although the details will be described later, during the small hitting game won by the first special symbol lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and so-called right-handed hitting the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2005, In the small hit game, the game ball B enters a specific area in the first special winning opening 2005 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). That is, winning the small hit in the first special symbol lottery is substantially equivalent to obtaining the chance to win the big hit with a reduced time with a probability of 1/3.

  When the game ball B enters the specific area and the small hit ends, a 6-round big hit game (the types are "7R time short symbol design 1" and "7R time short symbol pattern 2", but during the small hit) Since the opening of the first big winning opening 2005 is counted as one round, the big hit game is 6 rounds), and when the big hit game ends, the time saving state starts. If the game ball B does not enter the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game does not start and no time saving is provided.

  In the example of FIG. 154, the jackpot probability of “6R time shortened symbol 1” in the first special symbol lottery is extremely low (205/65536 × 4/200). In the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot winning rate (600/65536 x 1/3) via the small hit is much higher than the jackpot probability of "6R hourly shortened symbol 1", and all the big hits via the small jackpot are shortened. State is given.

  Further, during the non-time saving state, the game ball B does not enter the second starting opening 2004, or enters only with a very low probability, so the second special symbol lottery is not executed in principle. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 154, most of the opportunity to enter the non-time saving state (excluding a predetermined number of second special symbol changes immediately after the end of the time saving state. Details will be described later) is due to the first special symbol lottery. It is a big hit via a small hit.

  The jackpot of special figure 2 includes "4R time shortened symbol design 1" and "15R time shortened symbol design 1". Further, the small hit in the special figure 2 includes "5R time shortened symbol design 1", "16R time shortened symbol pattern 1", and "16R time shortened symbol pattern 2". Although the details will be described later, during the small hitting game which is won by the second special symbol lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, so-called right hitting and hitting the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2005, In the small hit game, the game ball B enters the specific area in the first big winning opening 2005 with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1).

  When the game ball B enters the specific area and the small hit is finished, if the type of the small hit is "5R time shortened symbol 1", the 4 round big hit game is the type of the small hit. In the case of "16R time reduction symbol 1" or "16R time reduction symbol 2", the 15-round big hit game starts, and when the big hit game ends, the time reduction state starts. That is, winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery is substantially equivalent to winning the big hit with a reduction in time. If the game ball B does not enter the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game does not start and no time saving is provided.

  In addition, in this chapter, the termination trigger of the time saving state is the end of the fourth special symbol fluctuation of the fourth time from the start of the time saving state, the eighth special symbol fluctuation from the start of the time saving state (that is, the first special symbol). The total number of fluctuations of the fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8 times), or the big hit game starts, whichever comes first. Needless to say, even if the time saving state ends due to the start of the big hit game, if the big hit is a big hit with a time saving, the new big saving game is entered again after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, during the fourth second special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state, by inserting the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004, the maximum of four fluctuations by the end of the fluctuation. Two special symbol fluctuation can be reserved. That is, the second special symbol variation can be executed up to eight times after entering the time saving state. According to the jackpot probability in the example of FIG. 154, the probability of winning the jackpot or the small hit in the four second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is about 54.9%, but during the time saving state and the time saving. The probability of winning the big hit or the small hit in the second special symbol lottery a total of 8 times after the completion is increased to about 79.7%.

  That is, the variation time during the second special symbol variation of the 4th time (the last variation of the hour reduction) is long enough to allow the game ball B to enter the second starting opening 2004 (specific variation. The time will be described later), the second special symbol fluctuation is executed in the non-time saving state of the fifth to eighth times, so that the payout rate is increased without increasing the so-called withdrawal probability during the time saving state. You can

  In addition, the termination of the time saving state, "the end of the 8th special symbol fluctuation (that is, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8 times) from the start of the time saving state" Is included for the following reasons. Although not shown in the drawing, during the time saving, even when the big hit of "2R time saving no symbol 1" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving is given after the end of the big hit game.

  If the condition is not included in the termination trigger of the time saving state, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed only three times during the time saving, and if the big hit or the small hit is not won, the second special symbol fluctuation. If you continue to execute the first special symbol variation rather than execute 5 more times, a situation will occur in which the payout rate increases. Therefore, in order to prevent such capture, the condition is included in the termination trigger of the time saving state.

  Further, in the conditions (the total number of changes of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8 times), the number of times "8 times" is adopted for the following reason. In order to prevent the above-mentioned capture, the number of times should be set as small as possible.

  On the other hand, if the number of times is 7 times, for example, when the condition for saving time is satisfied in the state where four reservations of the first special symbol variation are accumulated in the normal time of the non-time saving state, the game is played. The player may be satisfied with the reduction in time and may stop the game, such as taking a rest break or reporting to a friend. When the game is stopped and the time saving state is started in this way, the four reserved first special symbol variations are exhausted, so in the time saving state, the second special symbol variation can be executed only up to three times. Instead, it becomes a disadvantage for the player. In addition, if the player fears such a situation and plays the game so as not to suspend the first special symbol variation, the progress of the game may be delayed. Similarly, when the number of times is 6 times or less, similarly, depending on the number of pending first special symbol fluctuation at the time of jackpot winning, a situation in which the second special symbol fluctuation can be executed only at most 3 times or less occurs. Therefore, it is desirable that the number of times under the condition is eight.

  As described above, the condition (the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8 times) is included in the timing of ending the time saving state, in order to prevent the above-mentioned capture. .. In addition, if the conditions are not included in the end condition of the time saving state, such capture is possible only in the time saving state, in the first special symbol lottery, "2R time saving no symbol 1 Even when the big hit of “” is won, a time saving state is given after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, even if you win the big hit of "2R no time saving symbol 1" during the time saving state, if the time saving is not given after the big hitting game ends, such a strategy cannot be performed in the first place, so in this case, The condition does not have to be included in the termination trigger of the time saving state.

  FIG. 155 is a table showing an example of a pattern of opening time and closing time of the special winning opening, which is selected in each round of the big hit game or the small hit game. Patterns A and B are patterns of opening time and closing time of the second special winning opening 2006 that are opened and closed during the big hit game, and both are patterns in which an operation of closing after a long opening is executed once. ..

  Pattern C is a pattern of opening time and closing time of the first special winning opening 2005 which is opened / closed during the small hitting game won in the first special symbol lottery, and is closed a plurality of times after being opened. The pattern to execute. During the small hitting game, the game ball B that has entered the first big winning opening 2005 reaches a distribution member (characteristic product) that enters a specific area with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), The route through which the game ball B passes through the sorting member is also called a character route.

  Pattern D is a pattern of opening time and closing time of the first special winning opening 2005 which is opened and closed during the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, and the operation of closing after a short time opening is performed a plurality of times. The pattern to execute. The game ball B that has entered the first big winning opening 2005 enters the specific area with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1) without reaching the distribution member described above, so the game ball B is distributed accordingly. A route that enters a specific area without passing through a member is also called a direct V route.

  In each pattern, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B enter the opening special winning opening during the opening time, the pattern is changed even if the opening time is not finished. Transition to the indicated closure period. Specifically, for example, in pattern A, when 10 game balls B enter the second special winning opening 2006 before 29.000 seconds have elapsed after the second special winning opening 2006 was opened, , The closing period of 2.000 seconds begins and the round ends with the end of the closing period.

  156 (A) of FIG. 156 is a table showing an example of the time of the hit start effect (also called the opening effect), and (B) is a table showing an example of the time of the final hit effect (also called the ending effect). The opening effect is an effect performed from the start of the big hit game or the small hit game to the start of the first round of the big hit game or the small hit game. The ending effect is an effect that is performed from the end of the final round of the big hit game or the small hit game to the end of the big hit game or the small hit game. In the example of FIG. 156, for each pattern, the opening effect time and the ending effect time for each winning in the time saving state and the non-time saving state are defined.

  FIG. 157 is a table showing an example of the operation schedule of the special winning opening during the big hit game. In the table of FIG. 157, the opening production time, the special winning opening pattern of each round, and the ending production time are defined for each jackpot type.

  In the start j column, the time of the opening effect is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (A). In the column indicating each round, the open pattern in the round is defined by the identifier shown in FIG. 155. In addition, "lower" in the column indicates that the second special winning opening 2006 is opened during the opening time of the round. In the final y column, the ending effect time is defined by the identifier in FIG. 156 (B).

  In addition, the big hit via the small hit (that is, "special figure 1_7R time-short symbol 1", "special figure 1_7R time-short symbol 2", "special figure 2_5R time-short symbol 1", "special figure 2_16R time-short symbol 1", And in "Special figure 2, 16R time-saving pattern 2"), the opening time of the first round is not defined, there is one round of opening the big winning opening during the small hit game, and this is the one round. This is because it is treated as an eye. In the big hit game, when the opening effect is completed, the game moves to the second round.

  In addition, the pattern of the fifth round of the "special figure 2_16R time saving pattern 2" is B. In the pattern B, the closing time of the special winning opening is longer than that of the pattern A selected in the other rounds (the pattern A is 2.000 seconds and the pattern B is 9.000 seconds). For example, at the end of the second special symbol variation that won the "Tokuzu 2_16R time reduction symbol 2", execute a notification as if the "Tokuzoku 2_5R time reduction symbol 1" was won (e.g. 2_5R time shortened symbol 1 "stop the decorative pattern on the production display device 1600), in the long closing time (9.000 seconds) in the fifth round, the jackpot is" special figure 2_16R time shortened symbol 2 " You may execute promotion production to announce that there was.

  As a result, even if the notification of winning the jackpot of 5 rounds is executed at the end of the fluctuation, the player can expect that the player has won the jackpot of 16 rounds. Further, for a player who is not conscious of the promotion effect, the promotion effect can provide an uplifting feeling at a stretch.

  FIG. 158 is a table showing an example of an operation schedule of a special winning opening during a small hit game. In the table of FIG. 158, the opening production time, the special winning opening opening pattern of each round, and the ending production time are defined for each small hit type. In the example of FIG. 158, all the small hits are composed of an opening effect, one round, and an ending effect.

  Similar to FIG. 157, the opening j time is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (A) in the start j column. Further, in the column indicating each round, the open pattern in the round is defined by the identifier shown in FIG. 155. In addition, "right" in the column indicates that the first special winning opening 2005 is opened during the opening time of the round. In the final y column, the ending effect time is defined by the identifier in FIG. 156 (B). The pattern of the small hit round won in the first special symbol lottery is C (characteristic route), and the pattern of the small hit round won in the second special symbol lottery is D (direct V route).

[14-2. Small hit game]
The small hit game executed in this chapter will be described below. First, the operation of each part in the first big winning opening 2005 during the small hit game will be described. FIG. 159 is an enlarged front view showing an example of a schematic configuration inside the first special winning opening 2005. Note that the shape, size, and the like of each component in FIG. 159 may be exaggerated for convenience of description, and do not necessarily correspond to those in the other drawings. Further, for convenience of description, FIG. 159 does not show all the members provided in and around the first special winning opening 2005.

  Inside the first special winning opening 2005, for example, a first structure 2061, a second structure 2062, a specific region 2063, a side wall portion 2064, a side wall portion 2065, and a distribution member 2070 are provided. The first structure 2061 is arranged, for example, immediately below the first special winning opening 2005 in a front view. The first structure 2061 is, for example, a sphere having a recess capable of holding only one game ball B. In addition, even if the game ball B newly entered in the first big winning opening 2005 collides with the game ball B already held in the recess, the depth is such that the game ball B does not jump out of the recess. That is, it is desirable that the depression has.

  In addition, the first structure 2061 is a movable body in which the depression is directed toward the second structure 2062 at the initial position. At the time of its operation, the first structure 2061 rotates in the left direction when viewed from the front centering on the center of the sphere so that the recess faces upward in the front view.

  Therefore, when the game ball B enters the second special winning opening 2006 when the first special winning opening 2005 is open and the depression of the first structure 2061 faces upward in the front view, the game ball B becomes Only one is held in the depression of the first structure 2061. In the state where one game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061, even if the game ball B enters the first special winning opening 2005, the game ball B is held in the recess. Without being discharged, it is discharged to the lower left region of the first structure 2061 and does not go to the specific region 2063. Similarly, when the first structure 2061 is in the initial position, even if the game ball B enters the first special winning opening 2005, the game ball B is not held in the recess and the first structure 2061 It is discharged to the lower left area and does not go to the specific area 2063.

  Further, when only one game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061, the first structure 2061 rotates to the right when viewed from the front and returns to the initial position, and the game ball B becomes the second position. Head towards structure 2062. The second structure 2062 is a member that can be opened and closed. When the game ball B reaches the second structure 2062 during the opening of the second structure 2062, the game ball B falls downward in the front view of the second structure 2062 and finally enters the specific area 2063. .. Further, when the game ball B reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is closed, the game ball B passes over the second structure 2062 and the lower right direction of the second structure 2062 in a front view. Heading to the distribution member 2070 arranged at.

  The distribution member 2070 includes, for example, a bottom portion 2071, a front wall portion 2072, a front wall portion 2073, and a rotating portion 2074. The bottom portion 2071 is surrounded by the side wall portion 2064 and the side wall portion 2065 at both ends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and its shape is, for example, a disc shape.

  The front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073 are arranged at the end of the bottom portion 2071 on the front side in front view with a space left and right therebetween. In addition, for example, a first opening formed between the side wall portion 2064 and the front wall portion 2072, a second opening portion formed between the front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073, and a front wall portion 2073. The positions of the front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front are set at positions where the sizes of the third openings formed between the side wall portions 2065 are substantially the same.

  The rotating portion 2074 has, for example, a rotating shaft portion and a ball portion attached to a side surface of the rotating shaft portion. The rotating part 2074 rotates at high speed around the rotating shaft part to play the game ball B that has collided with the ball part.

  The game ball B reaching the distribution member 2070 collides with the front wall portion 2072, the front wall portion 2073, the side wall portion 2064, the side wall portion 2065, the ball portion of the rotating portion 2074, and the back wall of the game area 5a, and finally. Passes through the first opening, the second opening, or the third opening. The game ball B that has passed through the first opening enters the specific area 2063. The game ball B that has passed through the second opening and the third opening is discharged to the area below the distribution member 2070 and does not go to the specific area 2063.

  The distribution is performed so that the probability that the game ball B that has reached the distribution member 2070 will reach the first opening, the second opening, and the third opening will be approximately the same (to be 1/3). The position, shape, and size of each part in the member 2070, the rotation speed and the rotation direction of the rotating part 2074, and the like are defined.

  FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing an operation schedule of the movable body in the first special winning opening 2005 during the small hit game. The horizontal axis of the timing chart of FIG. 160 shows the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game. In addition, in the timing chart of FIG. 160, the ON and OFF states of the first special winning opening 2005 indicate the open state and the closed state, respectively, and the ON and OFF states of the first structure 2061 indicate the post-operation state (first The depressions of the structure 2061 face upward in the front view) and the initial position state (the depression of the first structure 2061 faces the second structure 2062), and the second structure 2062 is turned on and off. The states indicate an open state and a closed state, respectively.

  First, the operation schedule of the movable body in the small hit in the first special symbol lottery will be described. In the small hit that was won in the first special symbol lottery, the first big winning opening 2005, the schedule shown by the "first big winning opening (feature route)" in FIG. 160 ("special drawing 1_7R time saving symbol 1 in FIG. 158" And the special schedule 1_7R is the same as the schedule indicated by the time saving symbol 1)).

  When the small hit game starts, an opening effect of 3000 ms is executed, and thereafter, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened according to the schedule shown by the pattern C in FIG. 155. During the period when the first special winning opening 2005 is open (however, except for the first opening), the first structure 2061 is in the ON state. Thereby, when the game ball B enters the first special winning opening 2005 during the period, the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061.

  The first structure 2061 is turned off after a lapse of a predetermined time after the last opening of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game is completed. The second structure 2062 is in the OFF state at the timing when the first structure 2061 is switched to the OFF state. Thereby, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061 moves toward the distribution member 2070. Therefore, when the game ball B is inserted into the first big winning opening 2005 during the small hit game, one game ball B is inserted into the specific area 2063 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). be able to.

  Since the closing period (19.364 seconds (pattern C1 in FIG. 155)) between the first opening and the second opening of the first special winning opening 2005 is long, One structure 2061 is once turned off.

  Next, the operation schedule of the movable body during the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery will be described. In the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery, the first big winning opening 2005, the schedule shown by the "first big winning opening (direct V route)" in FIG. 160 ("Special figure 2_5R time saving symbol in FIG. 158" 1 "," special figure 2_16R time reduction symbol 1 ", and" special figure 2_16R time reduction symbol 2 "are the same as the schedule). In the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery, both the first structure 2061 and the second structure 2062 operate.

  When the small hit game is started, an opening effect of 3000 ms is executed, and thereafter, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened according to the schedule shown by the pattern D in FIG. 155. During the period when the first special winning opening 2005 is open (however, except for the first opening), the first structure 2061 is in the ON state. Thereby, when the game ball B enters the first special winning opening 2005 during the period, the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061. The first structure 2061 is turned off after a lapse of a predetermined time after the last opening of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game is completed. Furthermore, the second structure is turned on for a predetermined time from the timing when the first structure 2061 is turned off, and the second structure 2062 is turned off after the predetermined time has elapsed.

  As a result, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061 reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is open, and enters the specific area 2063. Therefore, when the game ball B is entered into the first big winning opening 2005 during the small hit game, one game ball B is entered into the specific area 2063 with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1). be able to. In other words, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the depression of the first structure 2061 reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is being opened. The second structure 2062 operates.

  In addition, since the closing period (5.420 seconds (pattern D1 in FIG. 155)) between the first opening and the second opening of the first special winning opening 2005 is long, One structure 2061 is once turned off.

  In addition, for example, in both the small hit game won in the first special symbol lottery and the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, the final opening of the first big winning opening 2005 from the start of the small hit game. By the time of the end, a so-called right-handed hit is performed by using the effect display device 1600 or the like, and an effect of urging the game ball B to enter the first special winning opening 2005 is executed.

  In the example of FIG. 160, the time from the start of the small hit game to the arrival of the period during which the first special winning opening 2005 is continuously opened in a short period (the second and subsequent opening periods) is a part. The direct V route is shorter than the product route. This is for the following reason.

  The direct V route is selected only when the small win is won by the second special lottery, and when the small win is won by the second special lottery, all the direct V routes that can win the big hit are selected with an extremely high probability. It In addition, the second special lottery is basically conducted only during the short-term condition or immediately after the end of the short-term condition. In other words, winning a small hit when the direct V route is selected is substantially equivalent to connecting a large hit. Therefore, in order to make the player feel the speed of the big hits, the first big winning opening 2005 is continuously opened in a short period after the small hitting game in which the direct V route is selected is started. (The opening period after the second time) is set to be short.

  In addition, even if the small hitting game won by the second special symbol lottery, if the ratio of selecting the accessory route rather than the direct V route is high, the first prize is won after the small hitting game starts. The period until the mouth 2005 is continuously opened in a short period (opening period after the second time) is preferably longer in the direct V route than in the accessory route. In this case, the proportion of the direct V route selected is low, and when the direct V route is selected, the jackpot can be won with an extremely high probability, so that the time on the direct V route is lengthened. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of rarity and elation. In other words, whether the purpose is to make the player feel the speed of a big jackpot, or to entertain whether or not a substantial jackpot can be obtained by the role route by the movement of the game ball. For example, the time may be set appropriately according to the purpose.

  Hereinafter, in the non-time saving state, an example of a detailed effect during the small hit game when the small hit game is won in the first special symbol lottery will be described. For example, during the first special symbol variation that wins the small hit game, a battle effect using the effect display device 1600 is executed, and the ally character is defeated in the battle effect. Next, a revival production in which a new ally character participates will be performed. In the revival production, the new ally character utters a line such as "Bet me and me!", And when the symbol of the first special symbol variation is confirmed, the ally new ally character battle production is displayed on the production display device 1600. The decorative pattern (that is, the small hit determination pattern) that indicates that is determined to be executed is stopped. It is not always necessary to display the defeat, such as displaying a dialogue such as "Believe in your power!" On the effect display device 1600 when the ally character wins. Needless to say.

  Subsequently, for example, at the same time when the opening effect of the small hit game is started, a small, so-called right-handed display is displayed on the upper right of the effect display device 1600. Simultaneously with the end of the opening effect, the battle effect of the ally character and the enemy character starts on the effect display device 1600, and the ally character and the enemy character are attacked and defended.

  Then, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) after the first closing period of the first special winning opening 2005 is started, a display that greatly urges the player to right-handed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time as well, the offensive and defensive actions of ally characters and enemy characters continue. Further, the large right-handed display may be performed and at the same time the small right-handed display may be deleted, or these two right-handed displays may be displayed simultaneously. At the same time as the end of the opening effect, a timer indicating the remaining time until the large right-handed display is displayed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Since the closing period of the first big winning opening 2005 is 19.364 seconds, if there is a large right hit display on the effect display device 1600 from the start of the small hit game, the player immediately starts the right hit. However, there is a possibility that a situation in which the game ball B cannot be won in the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time may occur, which may result in a decrease in the payout rate and a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game. Therefore, as described above, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the first closing period of the first special winning opening 2005, the effect display device 1600 is strongly displayed to urge rightward striking. In other words, it is very difficult to put the game ball into the special winning opening even if the player is right-handed, and it is very easy. ing.

  Subsequently, when it is determined that the game ball B is heading to the distribution member 2070 (specifically, for example, the sensor for detecting the game ball B entering the first special winning opening 2005 or the first structure 2061). When the sensor for detecting that the game ball B is held in the depression is detected), the display of the mode in which the teammate character is powered up in the battle effect is displayed. At this time, the right-handed display on the effect display device 1600 may be deleted, or a display such as “right-handed completion!” May be displayed on the effect display device 1600. You may.

  Then, when the game ball B reaching the distribution member 2070 reaches the specific area 2063, the team member character executes the effect on the effect display device 1600 to win the battle, and the game ball B reaches the distribution member 2070. If the player cannot reach the specific area 2063 (that is, if the player has passed through the second opening or the third opening), the team member character performs the effect on the effect display device 1600, which is defeated in the battle.

  In the case of a small win in the second special symbol lottery, for example, during the closing period (5.420 seconds) of the first special winning opening 2005, if the prize is won during the stock time described later, the stock is released. In the case of winning during the production, the final rock-paper-scissors production, which will be described later, a display production that urges the player to make a great right hit is performed at the same time when the closing period starts.

[14-3. Stock time production summary]
The outline of the stock time effect will be described below. 161 to 163 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the outline of the stock time effect. Note that FIG. 162 and FIG. 163 show an example of an outline of the production when stock can be acquired in the stock time production.

  FIG. 168 is a table showing an example of the variation time of each of the first to fifth second special symbol variations after the time saving state starts. When the first to fifth fluctuations are loss fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 205 seconds, 1 second, 1 second, 15 seconds, and 1 second, respectively. When the first to fifth fluctuations are hit fluctuations (that is, big hits or small hits fluctuations), the fluctuation times are 215 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. In this way, regardless of whether the special symbol variation is successful or not, a longer variation time is selected for the first variation as compared to other variations.

  The stock time effect is an effect that is executed after the big hit game with time saving is completed. FIG. 161 (A) shows a state where the ending effect of a big hit game with time saving is performed. In the example of FIG. 161, it is assumed that there is no suspension of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation at the end of the big hit game. In addition, the jackpot is not the jackpot that was won in the special symbol lottery during the stock time performance and the final rock-paper-scissor production that will be described later (that is, the condition that the time saving is given in the first special symbol lottery during the non-time saving state). Is satisfied).

  In (B), when the ending effect of the big hit game ends and the time saving state starts, a display urging the player to make a right hit and hit the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 (“right hit !!”). (Hereinafter also simply referred to as right-handed display) is displayed on the lower and upper right portions of the effect display device 1600. Note that, for example, the right-handed display in the lower part of the effect display device 1600 has a larger size than the right-handed display in the upper right part (not limited to this, for example, the number of right-handed displays is large, and the display is in a color different from the surroundings). , Or a blinking display or any other form that is easy for the player to recognize).

  (C) is a state in which one game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 in the state of (B), and as the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit, the second special symbol change has started. Simultaneously with the start of the second special symbol variation, a display indicating that the stock time effect has started is made on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the player executes right-handed striking to save the second special symbol fluctuation.

  (D) is a state 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation. After 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second special symbol variation, a timer indicating 200 seconds remaining is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the remaining time of the timer decreases with the passage of time. At the same time that the timer is displayed, the display indicating that the stock time effect has started in (C) is deleted. After the display indicating that the stock time effect has started is erased, a display indicating that the stock time effect is being performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600, for example, in the lower left part. In addition, the timing at which the display indicating that the stock time effect has started in (C) is deleted may be after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds) from the display on the timer. In addition, the player executes right-handed striking to save the second special symbol fluctuation.

  (E) is a state in which the remaining time of the timer is 185 seconds (that is, after 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation), and the state in which four second special symbol variations are reserved is stored. When four holds of the second special symbol variation are accumulated, the right-handed display at the bottom of the effect display device 1600 is erased. Note that the right-handed display in the upper right portion is kept displayed, for example, during the time saving state.

  Further, the decorative symbol changes at the same time as the start of the second special symbol change, and the dummy change of the decorative symbol is performed for 20 seconds from the start of the decrease of the timer value. The dummy variation of the decorative pattern is, for example, as in the state of (E), it seems that the decorative pattern is stopped by the combination of the loses (specifically, for example, the combination of the loses is not completely stopped). , The display is made in a slightly swaying manner), the variation of the decorative pattern is started again, and the effect of the content is repeated one or more times. In addition, in the dummy variation, instead of the combination of the decorative pattern gaps, a predetermined image for dummy variation may be made to appear to be stopped.

  (F) is a state where the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation). The variation of the decorative pattern dummy ends and the rock-paper-scissors competition production begins. After the dummy change ends, the decorative pattern continues to change until the symbol is determined.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, after 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation), the peripheral control MPU is about the suspended special symbol fluctuation transmitted from the main control MPU. By referring to the special symbol pre-determination command, it is prefetched to determine whether or not each of the suspended special symbol variations is a hit variation (that is, a big hit variation or a small hit variation).

  The peripheral control MPU is included in the second special symbol variation that is held at the time when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the variation starts) and the second special symbol variation that is being executed ( That is, based on the total number of fluctuations per unit of the first special symbol fluctuation (hereinafter also referred to as the stock number), the effect after 25 seconds from the fluctuation start is determined.

  At the time of (F), the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, and the peripheral control MPU wins the remaining 180 seconds of performance for 15 or 30 seconds of multiple rock-paper-scissors competition production and rock-paper-scissors competition production. And a 15 second stock appeal effect that is executed subsequently to the case. Each time you win a game of rock-paper-scissors competition, you will be notified that there is one hit variation (stock). Although the details will be described later, the number of times the combination production of the rock-paper-scissors win production (also called stock success production) and the stock appeal production (also called stock production) is executed is equal to or less than the unannounced stock number.

  162 and 163 explain an example in which the number of stocks is two. In addition, the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is a loss fluctuation (that is, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation is 205 seconds), and one of the fluctuations is the second next to the second special symbol fluctuation being executed. (2) It shall be a special symbol variation.

  (G) is a state in which the first game of rock-paper-scissors game is being performed. (H) is in a state of winning the first rock-paper-scissors game. In the following description, it is assumed that the hand displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600 is the hand of an ally character and the hand displayed on the right side is the hand of an enemy character. The first game of rock-paper-scissors competition is executed by using the remaining time of the timer from 180 seconds to 165 seconds for 15 seconds.

  (I) is a state in which the stock appeal effect is performed after the winning effect of the rock-paper-scissors game. The effect display device 1600 is informed that the first stock has been acquired (display of “stock GET × 1 !!” in the figure). The first stock appeal production is executed using the remaining time of the timer for 15 seconds from 165 seconds to 150 seconds.

  In (J), the stock appeal production is finished and the second rock-paper-scissors competition production is started. A display (ST in the drawing, hereinafter also referred to as a stock display) indicating that there is a stock that has been notified in the stock appeal production is displayed, for example, in the upper left of the production display device 1600. In addition, stock display, for example, until the end of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the stock, or until the start or end of the hit game corresponding to the stock (if the hit corresponding to the stock is a small hit, It may be until the start or the end of the big hit game which is triggered by the small hit.

  Note that, for example, in the stock appeal production, when notifying a hit with a large number of payouts, such as a big hit of "15R time shortened symbol 1", a small hit of "16R time shortened symbol 1", at a predetermined ratio. The premium effect may be executed (for example, notification by a character dedicated to the premium effect, etc.). In this case, the stock display at the upper left of the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the stock appeal effect may be in the premium mode (for example, a character dedicated to the premium effect is displayed).

  (K) is a state in which the stock time has ended, that is, 205 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the second special symbol fluctuation, which is a fluctuation in fluctuation, has ended. The effect display device 1600 displays a combination of decorative symbols that are missing. As described above, since the number of stocks is two, one more stock is notified by the end of the stock time, and two stock displays are displayed at the upper left of the effect display device 1600 at the end of the fluctuation.

  In the example of (K), the left decorative design is "5", the middle decorative design is "2", and the right decorative design is "4" as a combination of the missing decorative designs, but the stock is notified. In the variation in the state of being lost, even if a special combination of decorative patterns that reminds me of a hit (for example, the left decorative pattern and the right have the same number and the central decorative pattern is “V”) is stopped. Good. Further, even when the stock is not notified at the stock time, but there is a hold corresponding to the hit variation in the hold, the dedicated combination may be stopped at a predetermined rate.

  (L) of FIG. 163 is a state in which the second special symbol variation (variation time is 10 seconds, see FIG. 168) of the second variation, which is a small hit variation, has started. In (M), the combination of decorative symbols indicating a small hit is stopped, and an effect indicating that one stock has been discharged (display “stock discharged !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of (M), the stock display corresponding to the first stock is deleted at the end of the second special symbol variation. When the stock display is in the premium mode, the stock release effect may also be in the premium mode (for example, the notification of stock release by the premium effect dedicated character).

  (N) is a state where the small hit game has started. In order to enter the game ball B into the specific area 2063 in the first big winning opening 2005, a large right-handed display at the bottom of the effect display device 1600 and a first big winning opening such as "Aim for V !!" A display prompting the user to aim at a specific area in 2005 is displayed. (O) is a state where the big hit game is started by the game ball B entering the specific area 2063 during the small hit game. Even if the big hit game starts, the stock display corresponding to the unreleased stock is not erased.

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 162, one stock is notified in one stock appeal production, but when there are a plurality of unannounced stocks, a plurality of stocks are announced in one stock appeal production. May be. In the stock appeal effect, when notifying a plurality of stocks, an effect different from the case of notifying one stock may be executed. For example, a plurality of stocks may be notified by a notification by a plurality of characters dedicated to stock notification, a dedicated sound effect, a dedicated lighting pattern by various lamps, and the like.

  Also, when notifying a plurality of stocks, a rock-paper-scissor effect different from the normal rock-paper-scissor effect may be executed. For example, if a special teammate character or enemy character appears and wins a rock-paper-scissor effect, or if you win a rock-paper-scissors game with a predetermined combination of hands (for example, if your teammate is "par" and the enemy character is "goo"). ), Or when a teammate gives out a special type of hand (for example, a hand in which the little finger and the ring finger are folded and the other fingers are extended), the production pattern is set so that multiple stocks are fixed. May be.

  In addition, in the example of FIGS. 162 and 163, the example in which the second special symbol fluctuation of the first fluctuation is a loss fluctuation is explained, but the second special symbol fluctuation of the first fluctuation is a fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 215 seconds). In some cases, stock release is reported using 10 seconds after the stock time ends.

  FIG. 164, FIG. 165, FIG. 166, and FIG. 167, in the case where no stock can be acquired in the stock time performance, that is, the second special symbol fluctuation that has been held and the second special symbol fluctuation that is being executed. An example of the outline of the stock time effect when the total number of fluctuations (stock) is 0 is shown. Even when the stock cannot be acquired, the effects in FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (F) are the same. After FIG. 161 (F), the state transits to the state of FIG. 164 (G ′).

  (G ') is a state in which the first game of rock-paper-scissors game is being performed. (H ') is in a state of being defeated in the first rock-paper-scissors game. The first game of rock-paper-scissors competition is executed by using the remaining time of the timer from 180 seconds to 165 seconds for 15 seconds. Since it was defeated in the rock-paper-scissors competition production, the stock appeal production will not be performed.

  (I ') is a state in which the second game of rock-paper-scissors competition has started. (J ') is a state in which the stock time has ended, that is, 205 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the second special symbol fluctuation, which is a fluctuation in fluctuation, has ended. The effect display device 1600 displays a combination of decorative pattern defects. Further, since the stock number is 0 as described above, the stock display is not displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600 at the end of the fluctuation.

  (K ') is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the second variation, which is the variation in loss, has ended. On the effect display device 1600, the combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped. Moreover, the display of the stock time end of the effect display device 1600 remains.

  (L ') of FIG. 165 is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the third variation, which is the variation of loss, has ended. On the effect display device 1600, the combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped. Moreover, the display of the stock time end of the effect display device 1600 remains.

  (M ') is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the fourth variation, which is the variation of loss, has started. As described above, the variation time of the second variation of the second variation and the third variation of the variation variation is short (1 second), but the variation time of the second variation of the second symbol variation of the variation variation of the loss. Is longer than these (15 seconds). The hold charge effect is produced using this variation time.

  For example, the hold charge effect is started at the same time when the second special symbol variation starts. At the start of the hold charge effect, for example, a right-handed display similar to FIG. 161 (B) is displayed at the bottom of the effect display device 1600, and a hold charge start display indicating that the hold charge effect has started is displayed at the center. , The player is prompted to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. The hold charge start display is, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the hold charge effect, or when a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, one or four with the maximum hold number) enter the second starting opening 2004. Will be erased.

  (N ') is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the fourth variation, which is the variation of loss, has ended. When all four holds of the second special symbol variation have been accumulated, a display indicating that all the reservations have been accumulated (“Charge full !!” in the figure) is displayed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display is displayed. The right-handed display at the bottom of device 1600 is cleared. Since the variation is a variation of the loss, a combination of decorative patterns of the loss is displayed.

  (O ') is a state in which the fifth variation (variation time is 1 second), which is the variation in loss, has ended. On the effect display device 1600, the combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped. The loss variation is a variation during the non-time saving state, and the production before the final rock-paper-scissor production, which will be described later, is composed of four variations during the time reduction and one variation during the time reduction.

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 164, the example in which the fifth variation is the loss variation has been described. However, when the first to fourth variations are the loss variation and the fifth variation is the hit variation, the fourth variation is The hold charge effect is not executed in. In this case, a special effect extending from the second variation to the fifth variation is executed, and the winning is notified at the fifth variation.

  Therefore, as a general rule, when all the 1st to 5th fluctuations are loss fluctuations, the hold charge effect and the final rock-paper-scissor effect described below are executed. However, if the winning corresponding to the fifth variation is performed after the start of the second variation, or if it is performed after the look-ahead determination timing in the first variation, the fifth variation is a winning variation. Also, the hold charge effect is executed. The winning corresponding to the fifth variation is performed after the start of the second variation or after the timing of the prefetch determination in the first variation, and the first to fourth variations are the loss variations and the fifth variation. If is a hit variation, the special effect is not executed and the hit is suddenly notified at the fifth variation.

  In the case where this special effect is performed, the variation time of the second variation is 1 second, the variation time of the third variation is 1 second, the variation time of the fourth variation is 15 seconds, and the variation time of the fifth variation is 10 seconds. (See FIG. 168). Among the fluctuations in which the exclusive effect is performed, the total fluctuation time of the second to fourth fluctuations, which is the loss fluctuation, is longer than the fluctuation time of the fifth fluctuation, which is the winning fluctuation. In this way, since the variation time of the fifth variation, which is a variation of the hit, is short, it is possible to secure a long time for performing the production by the dedicated production using the second to fifth variations, and to perform the entertainment with rich interest. You can

  Although details will be described later, when there is a hit variation between the first variation and the fourth variation, a stock production is always generated during the first variation of the rock-paper-scissors effect of 180 seconds. Further, as described above, when the first to fourth fluctuations are lost and the fifth fluctuation is a hit, the special effect is performed from the second fluctuation. Therefore, if the stock effect does not appear in the first change and the exclusive effect does not start from the second change, the change up to the fifth change is a fixed loss. If the second, third, and fifth changes other than the fourth change in which the hold charge effect is performed are loss changes, a short change time (1 second) is selected, and the second special symbol change is held at the fourth change. Is set as a long time (a time longer than the second, third, and fifth fluctuations) for ensuring the maximum storage time.

  Although the example of notifying the presence or absence of stock by the rock-paper-scissor effect has been described, it goes without saying that the presence or absence of the stock may also be notified by an effect different from the rock-paper-scissor effect, for example, background change effect or dialogue effect. .. Even in that case, needless to say, the dialogue production may be set to have different expectations depending on the type of production, such that the dialogue production has higher expectations as the stock production.

  The effects of the sixth variation to the eighth variation will be described below. The final rock-paper-scissors effect is executed using the sixth to eighth changes, which are the changes held in the fourth change. Peripheral control MPU, based on the special symbol prior determination command, when it is determined that there is a hit variation from the 6th variation to the 8th variation, the final rock-paper-scissor production that extends from the 6th variation to the earliest variation It is executed as a continuous effect (however, if the sixth variation is a hit variation, the final rock-paper-scissors effect using only the sixth variation is executed).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU, based on the special symbol preliminary determination command, when it is determined that there is no hit variation from the 6th variation to the 8th variation, continuous production of the final rock-paper-scissors production that extends from the 6th variation to the 8th variation. Run as.

  The peripheral control MPU may refer to the special symbol preliminary determination command to determine the effect contents at the time of execution of the fourth and fifth fluctuations or at the start of the sixth fluctuation. The peripheral control MPU, for example, refers to the special symbol preliminary determination command at a predetermined timing of the fourth variation (for example, 10 seconds after the start of variation) for performing the hold charge effect, so that "final rock-paper-scissors" is performed during the hold charge effect. , Etc. can be displayed in a highly expected manner (for example, red letters). Further, after the lapse of the predetermined time, there is a high possibility that the 6th to 8th fluctuations are reserved. Further, since the variation time of the fourth variation is longer than the variation time of the fifth variation, such prefetching effect can be easily executed.

  At each change in the final rock-paper-scissors production, a rock-paper-scissors game is held, for example. In the final rock-paper-scissor production, the rock-paper-scissors game is won in the fluctuation that announces a hit, and the rock-paper-scissors game is lost in the fluctuation that announces a loss.

  However, if the 7th variation or the 8th variation is the earliest hit variation, the percentage of selection of the Icoko that is the variation prior to the hit variation in the final rock-paper-scissor production is the 6th to 8th variation. In the 6th variation or the 7th variation, it is assumed that it is higher than the rate at which Iiko is selected. In other words, Aiko in the final Janken production is a chance pattern. It should be noted that, for example, only when the eighth variation is the earliest hit variation, it is possible to select the second variation in both the sixth variation and the seventh variation, that is, in both the sixth variation and the seventh variation. In that case, the eighth variation may be confirmed as a hit.

  In the following examples of FIGS. 165, 166, and 167, the sixth and seventh fluctuations are loss fluctuations, and the eighth fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, that is, the final rock-paper-scissors ranging from the sixth fluctuation to the eighth fluctuation. The effect is executed as a continuous effect, and the winning is notified at the eighth variation.

  FIG. 169 is a table showing an example of the variation time of each of the second to sixth special symbol variations 6 to 8 times since the time saving state has started. The fluctuation times when the sixth to eighth fluctuations are loss fluctuations are 225 seconds, 160 seconds, and 375 seconds, respectively. When the sixth to eighth fluctuations are small hit fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 370 seconds, 305 seconds, and 380 seconds, respectively. When the sixth to eighth fluctuations are big hit fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 425 seconds, 360 seconds, and 440 seconds, respectively.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. (P ') is a state in which the sixth variation (variation time is 225 seconds), which is the variation in loss, has started. A display indicating that the final rock-paper-scissor production has started is displayed on the production display device 1600.

  (Q ') is a state following (P') in the sixth variation, which is the loss variation. A display indicating that the first rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissor production starts (“first match !!” in the figure) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Further, the effect display device 1600 displays a gauge indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The value of the gauge becomes 0 when the hit is notified, and the value of the gauge decreases at the chance pattern (for example, at this time).

  FIG. 166 (R ′) is a continuation state of (Q ′) in the sixth variation, which is the loss variation. The production to lose the rock-paper-scissors game is being executed. The value of the gauge has not decreased because it lost the rock-paper-scissors game. (S ') is the state at the end of the sixth variation, which is the loss variation. A display indicating that the final rock-paper-scissor production is still continuing (“Much more !!” in the figure) is displayed, and the combination of decorative patterns that have been lost has stopped.

  (T ') is a state in which the seventh variation (variation time is 160 seconds), which is the variation in loss, has started. A display indicating that the second rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production is starting (“second game !!” in the figure) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. (U ') is a state following (T') in the seventh variation, which is the variation in loss. A different game is being performed in a rock-paper-scissors game. As mentioned above, Aiko in the rock-paper-scissors game is a chance pattern. As shown in (U '), for example, in the case of Aiko, the gauge value is decreased.

  (V ') is the state at the end of the seventh variation, which is the loss variation. A display that shows that the final rock-paper-scissors production is still continuing and that the expectation of winning the rock-paper-scissors game in the next fluctuation is high because the chance pattern Aiko has been executed in the 7th fluctuation ("Your next hand in the figure is closed" !! ”) is displayed. In addition, a combination of the decorative pattern losses is displayed.

  (W ′) is a state in which the eighth variation (variation time is 440 seconds for a big hit and variation time is 370 seconds or 385 seconds for a small hit) that is a variation in win has started. A display indicating that the third rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production, that is, the last rock-paper-scissors game starts (“final battle !!” in the figure) is displayed on the production display device 1600.

  FIG. 167 (X ′) is a continuation state of (W ′) in the eighth variation which is the variation of the hit. On the effect display device 1600, a display is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the central pressing operation unit 303a. At this time, a display indicating that the winning effect is approached by repeated hits may be displayed, such as "I have run out of the enemy's hands!" It should be noted that such a continuous hit effect may be executed at the sixth and / or seventh variation, for example, when the hit expectation degree is higher than a predetermined value. Further, for the eighth variation, for example, the continuous hit effect may be always executed regardless of the hitting expectation degree.

  (Y ') is a state following (X') in the eighth variation which is the variation of the hit. After the continuous pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted (that is, after the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the valid state), one of the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a a predetermined number of times and the elapse of a predetermined time is satisfied. The state transitions to the (Y ′) state at the point of time. Note that the predetermined number of times may be set to be smaller as the hit expectation degree is higher, and may be set to be smaller as the hit expectation degree is lower. In (Y '), an effect of winning the rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Moreover, the value indicated by the gauge displayed on the effect display device 1600 is zero.

  (Z ') is a state at the end of the eighth variation, which is a variation of the hit. On the effect display device 1600, the combination of hitting the decorative symbols is stopped, and a message (“Congratulations !!” in the figure) indicating the hit is displayed.

  As described above, a series of effects consisting of stock time and hold charge effects are executed using the fluctuation of the time saving state and the first fluctuation of the start of the non-time saving state (in the above example, from the start of the time saving state to the first to fifth fluctuations). The final rock-paper-scissor production is executed using the second to fourth fluctuations in the non-time saving state (in the above example, from the start of the time saving state to the sixth to eighth fluctuations, that is, the last three second special symbol fluctuations). Has been done. Further, as described above, even if the average fluctuation time of each fluctuation in which the final rock-paper-scissor effect is executed is a deviation fluctuation, fluctuations in which the series of effects are executed (from the start of the time saving state to the first to fifth fluctuations). (Variation) is longer than the average variation time (see FIGS. 168 and 169). After entering the non-time saving state, since the second special symbol variation in which the winning probability is more advantageously set can be executed only at most four times, the variation is made in this way so as to maintain the player's expectation. Time is fixed. By setting the variation time in the seventh variation variation in FIG. 169 to be more than 215 seconds, all the variation time in which the final rock-paper-scissors effect is executed is changed to all variation time (time saving in which the series of effects is executed). It may be set longer than the variation time from the start of the state to the first to fifth variations).

  In addition, the branch point (at the start of the second variation of the non-time saving state) between the series of effects and the final rock-paper-scissor effect arrives during the non-time saving state for the following reason. Immediately after falling to the non-time saving state, the second special symbol variation having a higher winning probability is carried out up to four times. If the second special symbol fluctuation of the first half of them (first time in the above-mentioned example) was a loss fluctuation, in the second special symbol fluctuation of the latter half, if the effect in the same production mode as the loss fluctuation is executed, The player may not be able to get the expectation of winning. Therefore, the player's interest can be maintained by changing the effect mode during the non-time saving state.

  From the viewpoint of maintaining the interest of the player in this way, the end timing of the series of effects is preferably as early as possible after the non-time saving start. That is, the end timing is from the end of the third fluctuation after the start of the non-time saving state (that is, the final fluctuation of the rock-paper-scissors is performed at the fourth change after the start of the non-time saving state) to the end of the second fluctuation after the start of the non-time saving state. It is preferable that the time (that is, the final rock-paper-scissor production is performed at the 3rd to 4th fluctuations after the start of the non-time saving state), and further from the end of the second fluctuation after the start of the non-time saving state to the first time after the start of the non-time saving state. It is more preferable that the fluctuation ends (that is, the final rock-paper-scissor effect is performed in the second to fourth fluctuations after the start of the non-time saving state).

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU, for example, refers to the special symbol advance determination command at a predetermined timing of the fourth variation for performing the hold charge effect, and suggests the result of the final rock-paper-scissors effect after the sixth variation. The judge effect may be executed in the fourth variation. For example, it is performed according to the allocation indicated by the judge effect table.

  FIG. 174 is an example of a judge effect table. The judge effect table defines the distribution of the images of the hands selected in the judge effect, for each hold number at the predetermined timing, depending on whether or not there is a change in the change held up to the predetermined timing. .. The hands with a red aura, the hands with a white aura, and the hands without an aura are allotted in order of increasing expectation.

  A specific example of the judge effect will be described. For example, before the predetermined timing during the hold charge effect, the image of the hand is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the number of the hold is 0 or 1, and the image of the hand is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the number of the hold is two. An image of a hand without an aura is displayed, and when there are three holds, an image of a hand without an aura and a hand with a white aura are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when there are four holds. An image of a hand without an aura, a hand with a white aura, and a hand with a red aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  That is, when the number of holdings is 1 to 2, the image of the hand that does not have an aura is added on the effect display device 1600, and when the number of holdings is 2 to 3, a hand that has a white aura is added to the effect display device 1600. Is added, and when the number of holdings is changed from three to four, the image of the hand wearing a red aura is added on the effect display device 1600. Even if the hold is added after the predetermined timing, the hand image is not added.

  At the predetermined timing, the peripheral control MPU refers to the judge effect table and selects a hand. After the predetermined timing, the judge effect is started, and the peripheral control MPU displays the image of the selected hand on the effect display device 1600.

  In the example of FIG. 174, when the number of holdings is 2, a hand that does not wear an aura is selected in the judge effect. When the number of holdings is 3, a hand that does not wear an aura or a hand that wears a white aura is selected in the judge effect. When the number of holdings is 4, a hand without an aura, a hand with a white aura, or a hand with a red aura is selected in the judge production.

  Therefore, the distribution of the judge effect table is determined so that the hand finally displayed in the judge effect is included in the hands displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the predetermined timing is reached. Then, in the final rock-paper-scissor production, the teammate character plays the rock-paper-scissors game with the selected hand. For example, when a hand wearing a red aura is selected, the hand of the ally character wears a red aura in all the rock-paper-scissors games in the final rock-paper-scissors production.

  When the number of holdings is 0 or 1, the judge effect is not executed (no display in FIG. 174). This is because the final rock-paper-scissors effect will not be executed if the change in the hold charge effect is finished with the number of holds being 0 or 1.

  It should be noted that in the variation of the number of holdings of 2, an extremely small distribution may be set for the “white aura” and the “red aura”. Similarly, in the fluctuation of the number of holdings of 3, an extremely small distribution may be set for the “red aura”. Specifically, for example, the distribution of the hit fluctuations of 2 holds is 0 for "no display", 98 for "no aura", 1 for "white aura", 1 for "red aura", and 3 for hold. The distribution of the hit variation may be 0 for "no display", 50 for "no aura", 49 for "white aura", and 1 for "red aura".

  By setting the distribution in this way, when a hand that is not included in the hands displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the time when the predetermined timing is reached is selected in the judge effect, there is a hit variation. It will be confirmed. In addition, by setting the distribution in which such a fixed effect occurs to be small, it is possible to obtain a premium effect. Therefore, the generation of such an effect can give the player a feeling of uplifting. Further, when there are four holdings, such a fixed effect does not appear, so that the player can be provided with fun as a hidden effect.

[14-4. Information for executing stock time performance]
Hereinafter, a table that defines information necessary to execute the above-described stock time effect and final rock-paper-scissor effect will be described. In this chapter, three fluctuation pattern tables (table A, table B, and table C (all not shown)) are stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines the fluctuation patterns. First, one variation pattern table is selected from the three variation pattern tables, and a variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern tables.

  FIG. 170 is an example of the variation pattern table selection table. The fluctuation pattern table selection table is a table for selecting one fluctuation pattern table from the above-described three fluctuation pattern tables, and is stored in, for example, the ROM in the main control board 1310.

  The fluctuation pattern table selection table is, for example, the latest big hit (in the case of a big hit via a small hit, the state of winning) (time saving state or non-time saving state), the latest big hit (the big hit via the small hit). In this case, the type of (small hit), the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation of the selection target of the fluctuation pattern table from the end of the latest big hit, the current state (time saving state or non-time saving state), and the fluctuation of selection target of the fluctuation pattern table. A migration destination table is defined for each type (special figure 1 or special figure 2).

  In addition, although the number of shortening times of giving each type is defined in the variation pattern table selection table, it may be managed in another table. As described above, the termination trigger of the time saving state is the end of the fourth variation of the special symbol 2 after the time saving state starts, and the eighth special symbol variation (that is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 1 after the time saving state starts. It is the end of the total number of fluctuations in FIG. 2 (8 times) or the start of the big hit game, whichever comes first.

  In the example of FIG. 170, the most recent big hit is a big hit via the small hit of “Special drawing 1_6R time saving design 1”, the small hit is won in a non-time saving state, and the current state is a non-time saving state, In the variation pattern table selection table, the cell 1651 corresponds to the variation in the special figure 2 which is the sixth variation from the end of the big hit. Therefore, for the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the table A corresponding to the cell 1651.

  In addition, for example, the latest big hit is a big hit via the small hit of "Special figure 2_16R time saving design 1", the small hit is won in a time saving state, and the current state is the time saving state, when the big hit ends. The corresponding cell in the variation pattern table selection table is the cell 1652, which corresponds to the second variation from FIG. Therefore, for the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the table B corresponding to the cell 1652.

  In the example of FIG. 170, regardless of the latest jackpot type or variation type, the variation subject to selection in the variation pattern table (hereinafter also referred to simply as the objective variation) is the variation after the ninth variation (so-called normal time). ), Table A is selected. In addition, when the latest big hit is a big hit with time saving, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 and the target fluctuation is the 6th to 8th fluctuation after the end of the big hit (in this case, during non-time saving) , Table A is selected.

  Further, when the latest big hit is a big hit with a time saving, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1, and the target fluctuation is the first to eighth fluctuations after the end of the big hit (that is, the first to eighth fluctuations during the time saving state), Table A is selected. In other words, the table A is always selected when the special figure 1 changes during the time saving state. The table A is always selected in the variation of Toku-zu 1 during the time saving state. If the latest big hit is a big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 and the target fluctuation is the first fluctuation after the big hit ends (that is, the first fluctuation in the time saving state), the table A is To be selected.

  For example, in Table A, the variation time of the first variation in Toku-zu 2 during the time saving state is 205 seconds in the case of the loss variation and 215 seconds in the case of the hit variation. Thereby, the variation time of the first variation (that is, the first variation of the stock time effect) shown in FIG. 168 is realized. Further, it is desirable that the variation time of the first variation in the special figure 1 in the time saving state in the table A is also long as in the special figure 2 (205 seconds in the case of the variation in the deviation and 215 seconds in the case of the variation in the hit). If the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is short, and if the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is executed during the time saving state, it is not possible to enter a sufficient number of game balls B into the second starting opening 2004. This is because there is a risk that the number of times the second special symbol changes will be less than the expected number, which is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the stock time effect described above is also performed in the special figure 1 change having such a long change time.

  In Table A, the variation time when the sixth variation is the special figure 2 is 225 seconds when the variation is a loss variation, 370 seconds when the variation is a small hit, and 425 seconds when the variation is a big hit. In Table A, the variation time when the seventh variation is the special figure 2 is 160 seconds when the variation is a loss variation, 305 seconds when the variation is a small hit, and 360 seconds when the variation is a big hit. is there. Further, in Table A, the variation time when the eighth variation is the special figure 2 is 375 seconds when the variation is a loss variation, 370 seconds or 385 when the variation is a small hit, and 440 seconds when the variation is a big hit. Seconds. As a result, the variable time during the final rock-paper-scissor effect shown in FIG. 169 is realized.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 170, when the latest big hit is a big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of special figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the fifth fluctuation after the end of the big hit (in this case, in the non-time saving state). Yes, table B is selected. In addition, when the latest big hit is a big hit with a time saving, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Toku-zu 2, and the target fluctuation is the second to third fluctuation after the end of the big hit (that is, the second to third fluctuation during the time saving state) , Table B is selected. The variation time of the special pattern 2 in the variation pattern in the table B is 1 second in the case of the loss variation and 10 seconds in the case of the hit variation. As a result, the second, third, and fifth fluctuations (variation after the end of the stock time and before the start of the hold charge effect, and after the end of the hold charge effect and before the start of the final rock-paper-scissors effect) shown in FIG. 168. Time is realized.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 170, the latest big hit is a big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Toku-zu 2, and the target fluctuation is the fourth fluctuation after the big hit ends (that is, the fourth fluctuation in the time saving state). If so, table C is selected. The variation time of the special figure 2 in the variation pattern in the table C is 15 seconds in the case of the loss variation, and 10 seconds in the case of the hit variation. As a result, the variation time of the fourth variation (that is, variation of the pending charge effect) shown in FIG. 168 is realized. Note that, as described above, in the example of FIG. 170, in the time saving state, when the big hit of "Special figure 1_2R no time saving symbol 1" is won, the time saving state is given. However, the hold charge effect is performed for 15 seconds in the case of a loss variation.

  FIG. 171 is an example of a stock time effect block table. The stock time effect table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example. The stock time effect block table is effected from the state of FIG. 161 (F) (at the time when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, that is, when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) until the remaining time of the timer becomes 0 seconds. Is a table that defines

  The stock time effect block table holds the correspondence between the number of unreported stocks, the effect contents of each effect block, and the allocation. The unannounced stock number is not notified in the stock time effect before the second special symbol change in execution, out of the hit changes in the second special symbol change being executed, and the special symbol change being held. It is the number of variations per hit.

  Specifically, for example, during a non-time saving, there is no holding during the special symbol fluctuation, and you win the big hit with time saving, and after the big hit, start changing the special map 2 and start 25 seconds after the change starts. It is assumed that four fluctuations of special figure 2 are reserved until later (until the above-described prefetching determination is performed). In addition, it is assumed that, out of the total of the fluctuations of the special figure 2 in total, there are three hit fluctuations including the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the fluctuation. In this case, for example, three stocks are notified at the stock time. Also, when the fluctuation during the fluctuation ends, the big hit is rushed into, and after the big hit ends, the rush hour is again entered. In this case, the player is informed of the existence of two variations in hits, excluding the hits that have already been consumed. Therefore, for example, if one new hold of Toku-zu 2 is accumulated within 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation that starts immediately after the end of the big hit in this state, if the hold is a hold fluctuation fluctuation, the unreported stock The number is one, and the number of unreported stocks is zero if the suspension is a suspension variation suspension.

  It should be noted that 180 seconds from the remaining time of the timer of 180 seconds to 0 seconds is managed by being divided into 12 effect blocks of 15 seconds each. That is, each record of the stock time effect block table defines the effect schedule of 180 seconds by defining the effect contents of each effect block.

  "X" described in each effect block column (effect 1 to effect 12) indicates that the stock failure effect for 15 seconds (that is, defeat or aiko in rock-paper-scissors game) is executed. In addition, the black triangle is a stock failure effect for 30 seconds consisting of two adjacent effect blocks (for example, even if defeat or Aiko appears in a rock-paper-scissors game, instead of executing the rock-paper-scissors production from scratch, the defeat or the Aiko After the screen is displayed, the character screams, "Is it going to end like this?" And challenges the rock-paper-scissors again, but eventually loses. Further, a black circle indicates that the stock success effect (that is, victory in the rock-paper-scissors game) for 15 seconds or 30 seconds consisting of two adjacent effect blocks is executed. Further, a white circle indicates that the stock appeal effect is executed for 15 seconds immediately after the stock success effect. Hereinafter, the combination of the stock success effect and the stock appeal effect executed immediately after the stock success effect is also referred to as a stock effect.

  In the example of FIG. 171, stock production is not selected in the first and last production blocks (production 1 and production 12) in all production schedules. If the stock production is executed immediately after entering the time saving state, the player may feel the rush, and therefore the stock failure production is always selected in the first production block. Also, by always selecting the stock failure effect in the last effect block, the player's feelings can be calmed down if no stock is notified in the effect schedule up to 165 seconds (up to effect 11). be able to. However, the stock appeal in the effect 12 is executed when the stock effect is executed in the effect 11. In addition, stock failure production is selected in production 9 in all production schedules. As a result, it is possible to temporarily calm the player's feelings of refraining from the last three effect blocks (the effect of remaining 45 seconds).

  Moreover, the stock production column specifies the stock production to be executed in the production schedule. "No stock effect" is selected when the number of unreported stocks is zero. "Stock effect 1" and "stock effect 2" are selected when the number of unreported stocks is one. "Stock effect 3" and "stock effect 4" are selected when the number of unreported stocks is two. "Stock effect 5" and "stock effect 6" are selected when the number of unreported stocks is three. “Stock effect 7” and “stock effect 8” are selected when the number of unreported stocks is four or five.

  It demonstrates concretely in FIG. For example, when the number of unannounced stocks is 1, the production numbers 5 to 16 are distributed. In this case, for example, the effect number 5 is selected by 64/256, and the effect number 9 is selected by 16/256. For example, when the production number 5 is selected, the stock success production is performed by the production 2 (the production which is started 40 seconds after the variation is started).

  FIG. 172 is an example of a stock production specification table. The stock effect specification table specifies a hit effect lottery table for drawing lots of stock effects executed in each effect schedule. The peripheral control ROM stores, for example, an effect drawing table per 30 seconds (not shown) and an effect drawing table per 45 seconds (not shown).

  The production lottery table per 30 seconds includes one or more stock productions each consisting of 15 seconds of stock success production and 15 seconds of stock appeal production (total 30 seconds), and distribution of each of the one or more stock productions. , And are stored. The production drawing table per 45 seconds has one or more stock productions each consisting of 30 seconds of stock success production and 15 seconds of stock appeal production (45 seconds in total), and distribution of each of the one or more stock productions. , And are stored.

  That is, for example, the peripheral control MPU refers to the stock production specific table when the production of which the value of the stock production column of the stock time production block table is “stock production 4” is selected, and the stock production specific table is referred to for the first stock production, The effect contents are selected according to the allocation of the drawing table per 30 seconds, and for the second stock effect, the effect contents are selected according to the allocation of the drawing table per 45 seconds.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol preliminary determination command for the suspended special symbol variation transmitted from the main control MPU, at the time when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, that is, 25 seconds from the variation start. At the time point elapsed, it is determined whether or not each of the special symbol fluctuations that have been held has a hit fluctuation. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not each of the special symbol fluctuations that have been held has a hit fluctuation.

  In addition, for example, when the main control MPU has transmitted the pre-determination command for the pending fluctuation, and there is a new start prize before the start of the fluctuation, when the fluctuation corresponding to the start prize is a hit fluctuation. It may be configured such that a pre-determination command is transmitted, and the pre-determination command is not transmitted when the variation corresponding to the starting winning is a loss variation.

  Peripheral control MPU, the special symbol fluctuation that is held 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed, and the total number of hit fluctuations included in the number obtained by subtracting the notified stock number, Calculated as the number of unreported stocks. The peripheral control MPU determines the effect by referring to the stock time effect block table and selecting the effect corresponding to the number of unreported stocks in accordance with the allocation indicated in the allocation column, thereby realizing the stock time effect described above. be able to.

  If the hit variation is suspended after the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, the notification of the hit variation as stock is not executed. For the hit variation not notified as stock, for example, the hit is notified when the hit variation is executed.

  However, the peripheral control MPU is at a predetermined timing after the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (for example, at the end of each production block. However, one stock production requires 30 seconds at the shortest, so the production is performed. 11 and the end of the effect 12), the number of unreported stocks may be calculated again. In this case, for example, the peripheral control MPU replaces a part of the stock failure production of the selected production schedule with the stock production, or reselects the production schedule capable of notifying the unreported stock to produce the production schedule. Change on the way. In addition, the timing of calculating the unreported stock number again and changing the effect schedule according to the calculation result may be once or plural times.

  Note that, for example, when the hit variation is suspended before the first stock number calculation timing, in principle, the stock effect corresponding to the hit variation is announced at the stock time. In this case, if there is a winning of the variation of the winnings after the first stock number calculation timing and before the second stock number calculation timing, the stock production corresponding to the hit is performed at the stock time. The production may be changed, and in the next stock time (in principle, the big hit corresponding to the fluctuation of the stock before the first stock number calculation timing will be shortened and the stock time will be entered again). You may perform the stock production corresponding to the hit variation.

  In addition, when there is no suspension of winning fluctuation before the first stock number calculation timing, and there is a winning fluctuation prize after the first stock number calculation timing and before the second stock number calculation timing. , The effect may be changed so that the stock effect corresponding to the hit is performed at the stock time, or the hit effect may be suddenly executed without changing the effect at the stock time. (For example, a sudden change is notified in a hit variation).

  It should be noted that, for a player who does not want to be notified of the number of hits in the stock time, the above timing may be notified in advance by a timer display or the like. In addition, as described above, the number of unreported stocks is calculated only once (only when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds), so that the number of hits is notified for the hold accumulated after the timing. It is possible to provide a silent game property that is not played, and for a hold accumulated before the timing, a stock time effect including an expectation level of the hold can be provided.

  It should be noted that the timing of the one time is set so that a sufficient time for allowing the four game balls B to enter the second starting opening 2004 can be secured from the start of the fluctuation to the timing of the one time. Is desirable.

  Specifically, for example, the time of the interval at which the game ball B is fired is X, and the average time until the game ball B fired when the player hits to the right is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2511 is Y, Let Z be the probability that the game ball B fired when the player makes a right hit when the second starting opening 2004 is opened enters the second starting opening 2004. In this case, for example, the one-time timing is determined to be Y + (4X / Z) + K (seconds) after the start of fluctuation. However, K is a constant and is, for example, a margin for the time until the player holds the handle and shoots the game ball B.

  Further, it is desirable that the one timing is the first half of the variation time. For example, in the above example, if X = 0.6, Y = 5, Z = 0.5, and K = 2, the timing of the one time is 5+ (4 × 0.6 / 0) from the start of fluctuation. .5) + 2 = 11.8 seconds later. That is, it is desirable to select the variation time (that is, 23.6 seconds or more) so that 11.8 seconds is the first half of the variation.

  It should be noted that with respect to the hold charge effect as well, when the prefetch is executed at a predetermined timing of a change in which the hold charge effect is performed, it is desirable that the predetermined timing be similarly set. However, as described above, with respect to the hold charge effect, if four reserves of the second special symbol variation are accumulated in the stock time effect, the second special symbol variation is suspended at the start of the variation to execute the hold charge effect. Since at least one is left, in this case, it is sufficient that the three game balls B can be inserted into the second starting opening 2004 from the start of the change to the predetermined timing. That is, the predetermined timing may be set to Y + (3X / Z) + K (seconds) after the start of the change. Further, in the hold charge effect, in order to store four hold of the second special symbol fluctuation, the change time in the change in which the hold charge effect is executed needs to be equal to or longer than the time until the predetermined timing comes. .. The same applies when the prefetch effect is not executed in the hold charge effect.

  In the example of FIG. 171, when the number of unreported stocks is 5, the stock effect is performed 4 times, but the stock effect may be performed 5 times. In addition, when the stock production is performed four times and the four stocks are notified when the number of unreported stocks is 5, the hit fluctuations corresponding to the first to fourth fluctuations are the stock time of the fluctuation during the execution. It is assumed that the effect is notified and the hit corresponding to the fifth variation is not notified in the stock time effect. As a result, all the hits are not necessarily notified in the stock time effect, so that the player's interest is maintained even after the second change. In addition, at the timing of calculating the stock number of the first fluctuation, some of the stored winning information (for example, winning information of special figure 1) is not included in the unreported stock (that is, not notified at stock time). May be

  Also, in the example of FIG. 171, when the number of unreported stocks is four or less, the same number of stock effects as the number of unreported stocks are performed. That is, in the example of FIG. 171, one stock production is used to notify one stock, but as described above, one stock production may be used to notify a plurality of stocks. On the contrary, part or all of the unreported stock does not have to be reported until the start of the fluctuation. In this case, for example, in the hit variation, an effect of winning a rock-paper-scissors game by reversing may be executed.

  If the 1st to 4th fluctuations are loss fluctuations and the 5th fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (however, if the winning corresponding to the 5th fluctuation is made before the start of the 2nd fluctuation) However, the peripheral control MPU treats the unreported stock number as 0 when referring to the stock time effect block table. In this case, as described above, the exclusive effect extending from the second variation to the fifth variation is executed, and the winning is notified at the fifth variation.

  In the example described above, the rock-paper-scissors effect during the 180 seconds of stock time is an effect that suggests the winning of the 1st to 5th fluctuations, and the final rock-paper-scissors production is an effect that suggests the winning of the 6th to 8th fluctuations. You may change this ratio. Specifically, for example, the rock-paper-scissor effect for 180 seconds of stock time may be an effect that suggests the winning of the first to fourth fluctuations, and the final rock-paper-scissor effect may be an effect that suggests the winning of the fifth to eighth fluctuations. The ratio of the hit expectation in the rock-paper-scissors production for 180 seconds of the stock time and the hit-expectation in the final rock-paper-scissors production is about 4: 3 in the former, but is the same as 4: 4 in the latter.

  In addition, when there is a notified stock and the total of the number of unreported stocks (N) and the number of notified stocks is 5, the peripheral control MPU sets the number of unreported stocks to N-1. As an example, the production schedule may be selected from the stock time production block table.

[14-5. Hit in the first special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state]
FIG. 173 (A) is an explanatory view showing a time schedule when a small hit is won by the first special symbol variation corresponding to the winning in the time saving state, and FIG. 173 (B) corresponds to the winning in the time saving state. It is an explanatory view showing a time schedule when the big hit is won by the first special symbol variation. Regarding the winning of the first special symbol lottery that was won during the time saving state, it will not be announced at stock time as described above. Therefore, when winning in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state, for example, an effect different from the effect described above is executed in the corresponding first special symbol variation.

  Specifically, for example, the variation time of the first special symbol variation is 1000 ms, which corresponds to the winning in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state. Therefore, in Table A in FIG. 170, the variation time is defined. That is, in the variation of the hit, the decorative pattern varies for 1000 ms. During this time, other effects are not executed on the effect display device 1600. Then, the combination of the winning decorative patterns is stopped for 500 ms.

  Then, the winning game starts. The operation schedule of each special winning opening and the structure within the special winning opening in the winning game is as described above. The effect executed during the winning in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state is the same as the effect executed during the winning during the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state, for example.

[14-6. Multiple types of time saving conditions]
In the above-described example, the timing of ending all the symbols with time saving is the same (that is, the number of times of saving time), but the ending timing may be different depending on the winning symbol. For example, "Special figure 1_6R time-short pattern 1", "Special figure 1_6R time-short pattern 1", "Special figure 1_7R time-short pattern 1", "Special figure 2_4R time-short pattern 1", "Special figure 2_5R time-short pattern 1" , And "special figure 2_16R time-short symbol 1" is called an advantageous state imparting symbol 1, "special figure 1_7R time-short symbol 2", "special figure 2_15R time-short symbol 1", and "special figure 2_16R time-short symbol 2" Will be referred to as an advantageous state imparting pattern 2.

  Further, the timing of ending the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as time saving state 1) given by the advantageous state giving symbol 1 is, for example, as described above, the end of the fourth special symbol variation for the fourth time after the time saving state has started. The end of the 8th special symbol fluctuation (that is, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8 times) from the start of the time saving state, or the start of the jackpot game, whichever comes first. It is assumed that That is, the number of time saving provisions by the advantageous state provision symbol 1, the second special symbol variation is four times, or the total of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is eight times, whichever is smaller.

  In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as time saving state 2) given by the advantageous state giving symbol 2 is, for example, the end of the second special symbol variation 100 times after the time saving state starts, and the time saving state is The 104th special symbol fluctuation from the start (that is, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 104 times), or the start of the big hit game, which is assumed to have come first. .. That is, the number of times of the time saving state 2 is the smaller one of the second special symbol fluctuation 100 times or the total of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation 104 times.

  According to the example of FIG. 154, in the second special symbol lottery that can be easily executed during the time saving state, the probability of winning the win is 11878/65536 (small hit probability 11623/65536 + big hit probability 205/65536). And, since the time saving state 2 continues until the second special symbol variation is performed up to 100 times, the winning in the second special symbol lottery can be almost certainly won in the time saving state 2. That is, to enter the time saving state 2 (that is, to win the advantageous state imparting pattern 2) is substantially equal to the continuation of the big hit continuous holiday cottage.

  Hereinafter, the fluctuation patterns in each of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 will be described. For example, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the time saving state 1 is set to 40 seconds when the hit fluctuation occurs and 35 seconds when the deviation fluctuation occurs. However, the final fluctuation of the time saving state 1 (that is, the second special symbol fluctuation of the fourth time, and the eighth variation (total of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation), and the fluctuation that comes first ), The variation time is set to be 100 seconds in the variation of hit and the variation of loss.

  The fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the time saving state 1 is set to be, for example, 40 seconds when the hit fluctuation occurs and 35 seconds when the miss deviation occurs. However, the final fluctuation of the time saving state 1 (that is, the second special symbol fluctuation of the fourth time, and the eighth variation (total of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation), and the fluctuation that comes first ), The variation time is set to be 100 seconds in the variation of hit and the variation of loss.

  Further, the variation time in the variation pattern of the time saving state 2 is set to be, for example, 2 seconds or 3 seconds when the variation is a hit, and 2 seconds when the variation is a loss. However, the final fluctuation of the time saving state 2 (that is, the 100th second special symbol fluctuation, and the 104th fluctuation (total of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation), and the fluctuation that came first. ), The variation time is set to be 100 seconds in the hit variation and the loss variation, as in the time saving state 1.

  That is, when comparing the fluctuation times in the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2, the fluctuation time shorter in the time saving state 2 than in the time saving state 1 is selected in all the fluctuations except the final fluctuation.

  In the time-saving state 2, the variation time is set to be extremely shorter than that in the time-saving state 1 except for the final variation, so that the big hit can be generated early. As a result, it is possible to provide the sense of speed of a large-scale condominium. Further, as a player, it is understood that the entry into the time saving state 2 is equivalent to the fact that the jackpot is substantially continued. Even if the variation time is set to be long, it is not possible to make the player have an expectation, and the player may be bored. Therefore, such a short variation time is adopted in the time saving state 2. Is desirable.

  It is assumed that the variation time of 2 seconds or 3 seconds is selected in the hit variation of the time saving state 2, but the selection rate of the variation time of 3 seconds is low and the selectivity of the variation time of 2 seconds is set high. Is desirable. As a result, even if the variation time of 2 seconds is selected (although variation time of 2 seconds is always selected except for the final variation in the loss variation of the time saving state 2), the player can be expected to win the variation. In addition, when the variation time of 3 seconds in which the hit is determined is selected, the player can have an uplifting feeling.

  In the time saving state 2, for example, an early effect is executed. For example, even if the ending effect of the big hit game that shifts to the time saving state 2 ends and the player enters the time saving state 2, the same background as during the big hit game is displayed.

  In the early stage effect, for example, the decorative pattern is changed while the background is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative pattern is displayed small in an inconspicuous region (for example, the upper right portion) on the effect display device 1600. In the time saving state 2, for example, the remaining number of time saving is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that, for example, when the remaining number of time saving is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 4 times or less), the remaining number of time saving may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 even in the time saving state 2.

  In addition, this early production is continued until, for example, the start of the first fluctuation of the next time saving state 1 or immediately before the final fluctuation of the time saving state 2. In addition, when the big hit or the small hit which the time saving state 2 is not given in the time saving state 2, during the big hit game, or during the small hit game and during the big hit game won through the small hit, On the effect display device 1600, a background similar to the big hit game to which the time saving state 2 that started the early effect is added is displayed, and the early effect continues. Further, the number of rounds of the big hit game executed during the early effect may be displayed as a total with the number of rounds of the big hit game to which the time saving state 2 that started the early effect is added.

  Therefore, in the time saving state 2, it is possible to execute the early effect by exceeding the maximum number of fluctuations that can be held. Further, with these effects, it is possible to realize an effect in which the big hit game is continued from the time when the big hit game first enters the time saving state 2 to the end of the early effect. In addition, early production is executed during the big hit game that triggers the shift to time saving state 2, and the early production is continuously displayed even at the ending time of the big hit game, and the early production is continued even when shifting to time saving state 2. You may make it display it.

  Even if the fluctuation is interrupted, the early effect is continuously displayed. If the change is interrupted and a predetermined time has passed, the early effect is terminated and an effect different from the early effect (for example, an effect that concretely indicates the current state, such as "It is in an advantageous state") is generated. It may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even when such different effects are displayed, it is preferable to continue the right-handed display.

  In both the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2, the variation time is set to be 100 seconds in the hit variation and the loss variation, but the same effect is produced in both the time saving state 1 and the time reduction state 2. You may execute. For example, the above-mentioned hold charge effect is an example of the same effect.

[14-7. Production at the end of final rock-paper-scissors production]
Below, the production executed at the end of the final rock-paper-scissors production will be described. FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a final rock-paper-scissor effect. (X ′) is a continuation of FIG. 166 (W ′). That is, (X ′) is a state in the middle of the 8th variation (from the start of time saving to the special map 2). However, the fluctuation in (X ′) is assumed to be a deviation fluctuation. 175 (X ′) is the same as FIG. 167 (X ′), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  (Y ″) is a continuation state of (X ′) in FIG. 175 of the eighth variation in FIG. After the continuous pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted (that is, after the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the valid state), one of the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a a predetermined number of times and the elapse of a predetermined time is satisfied. The state transitions to the (Y ″) state at the point of time. In (Y ″), an effect of losing the rock-paper-scissors game is being executed. Moreover, the value of the gauge displayed on the effect display device 1600 remains and is not 0.

  (Z ″) is the state at the end of the eighth variation (continuation of (Y ″)) which is a deviation variation. On the effect display device 1600, a message indicating that the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and the final rock-paper-scissors effect is finished (“final rock-paper-scissors end ...” in the figure) is displayed.

  (A "") is a state in which the eighth variation of Toku-zu 2 which is an out-of-variation has ended. On the effect display device 1600, a message urging the player to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002 (so-called left-handed execution) (“return to left-handed” in the figure) and left-handed execution The arrow pattern that encourages and is displayed. Although the time saving state has ended when the fourth variation of the special figure 2 ends, the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting execution of these left-handed strokes for the first time.

  That is, in the fifth variation to the eighth variation of special figure 2, the time saving state has already ended and returned to the normal state, but in these variations, a display urging execution of left-handing is displayed on effect display device 1600. It has not been. Since these fluctuations, which are the fluctuations in Toku-zu 2, are fluctuations with a high expectation of hitting, the player stops the launch of the game ball B by not displaying a display instructing how to hit on the effect display device 1600. You can concentrate on the production with high expectations.

  However, when the right stroke is executed in the fifth variation to the eighth variation of Toku-zu 2, the effect display device 1600 may display a display that urges the left stroke or a display that quits the right stroke. This is because if the player who misunderstands that the time-saving state continues is left-handed, the number of balls thrown out decreases, which is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, specifically, for example, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 (or the general winning opening 2001 that can enter the game ball B only when the player hits the right side) a predetermined number of times (for example, once), or the handle 182 is It is determined that the right-handed stroke has been executed when the rotation is performed by a predetermined angle or more.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the special movement 2 of the special figure 2 ends, the time saving state ends, and the special figure 2 has two or three reservations when the time saving state ends, and corresponds to the suspension. When all the fluctuations to be performed are out-of-coordinate fluctuations, the final rock-paper-scissor production is finished without winning the winning in the sixth fluctuation or the seventh fluctuation. Also in this case, similarly, a display prompting the execution of a left-handed stroke is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the end of the fluctuation that ends the final rock-paper-scissor effect.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, when the fourth variation of special figure 2 ends, the time saving state ends, and there is no special figure 2 hold at the end of the fourth variation of special figure 2, or the special figure 2 is not held. If there is only one out-of-range variation, the stock time effect is finished without executing the final rock-paper-scissors effect. In this case, the variation that ends the stock time effect (that is, the fourth variation when the special figure 2 is not held, and the fifth variation when the special figure 2 is only one of the off changes) After the end, a display that urges the player to left-handed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[14-8. Production during the big hit game]
176 and 177 are explanatory views showing an example of effects during the big hit game. In (A), the big hit game starts and the big hit opening effect starts. (B) is a state during the big hit opening production. In (B), a so-called right hit is displayed, and a right hit display that prompts the player to enter the game ball B into the second big winning opening 2006 (a large arrow described as "right hit !!" in the figure, Hereinafter, also referred to as "right-handed display (large)" is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600.

  (C) is a state in which the opening effect of the big hit is finished and the first round of the big hit is started. The right-handed display (large) is erased from the effect display device 1600 by the end of the opening effect. In (C), a right-handed display that prompts the player to enter the game ball B into the second special winning opening 2006 is described at the bottom of the effect display device 1600 (in the figure, "right-handed !!" A plurality of arrows lined up in the horizontal direction, and hereinafter, a display including the plurality of arrows is also referred to as “right-handed display (middle)”).

  Further, in (C), in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, there is a right-handed display for prompting the player to enter the game ball B into the second special winning opening 2006 (in the figure, “right-handed !!”). One described arrow, hereinafter also referred to as "right-handed display (small)", is displayed. It should be noted that it is assumed that the display area in the effect display device 1600 is larger in the order of right-handed display (large), right-handed display (medium), and right-handed display (small).

  The main control MPU always lights the right hitting notification lamp during a period in which the right hitting is executed to advance the game, such as during the big hitting game, the small hitting game, and the time saving state. The right-handed notification lamp is provided, for example, in the function display unit 1400 or on a board that can be controlled based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, at a position visible to the player.

  When the period starts, the main control MPU turns on the right-handed notification lamp and transmits a control signal indicating that the period has started to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU displays right-handed display (for example, at least one of right-handed display (large), right-handed display (middle), and right-handed display (small)) on the effect display device 1600 according to the control signal. .. Further, when the period ends, the main control MPU ends the lighting of the right-hand notification lamp and transmits a control signal indicating that the period has ended to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU erases all right-handed displays from the effect display device 1600 according to the control signal.

  That is, during the period, the right-handed notification lamp is constantly lit, and at least one right-handed display is constantly displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, for example, the peripheral control MPU may synchronize the right-handed display (small) with the right-handed notification lamp by constantly displaying the right-handed display (small) on the effect display device 1600 during the period.

  (D) is a state in which the final round of the big hit is being executed. The right hit display (middle) and the right hit display (small) remain displayed from the start of the first round. Stock time challenge rock-paper-scissors production has started at the same time as the start of the final round, and the opening production of the stock-time challenge rock-paper-scissors is being performed. Stock time challenge In the rock-paper-scissor production, if you win the rock-paper-scissors game, you will be in a shorter time after the big hit, that is, you will be able to execute the stock-time production. On the other hand, in the stock time challenge rock-paper-scissor production, if you lose the rock-paper-scissors game, you will return to the normal state after the jackpot is over, that is, the stock-time performance will become unexecutable.

  In other words, the stock time rock-paper-scissor effect is an effect that announces whether the big hit being executed is a big hit with a time saving or a big hit without a time saving. In addition, since the big hits via the small hits and the big hits that are won in the special map 2 are all big hits with time saving, it is desirable that the stock time rock-paper-scissor production be performed in the big hits that do not go through the small hits selected in the special map 1. ..

  (E) is a continuation state of (D) in the final round of the jackpot. On the effect display device 1600, a rock-paper-scissor effect is performed, and an effect that the teammate character is defeated by rock-paper-scissors is displayed. (F) is a continuation state of (E) during the final round of the jackpot. Since the teammate character has been defeated in the rock-paper-scissor production, the character "sorry ..." is displayed on the production display device 1600. In other words, it was announced that the big hit during the execution was a big hit without time saving.

  FIG. 177 (G) shows a state where a big hit ending effect is being performed. In the ending effect of the big hit, the right-handed display (middle) is deleted from the effect display device 1600, but the right-handed display (small) is continuously displayed. (H) is a state in which the jackpot is finished, the normal state is returned to, and the suspended variation of Toku-zu 1 is started. After hitting the jackpot, a left-handed display that prompts the player to hit the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 (the two arrows marked "left-handed" in the figure, and the letters "Please return to left-handed") Is displayed for a predetermined time on the effect display device 1600.

[14-8. Special cases in hold charge production and final rock-paper-scissor production]
Hereinafter, special cases in the hold charge effect and the final rock-paper-scissor effect will be described. As described above, in the hold charge effect, it is urged to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 until the number of reserves in the special diagram 2 reaches the maximum (4), but due to an operation error of the player, etc. It may not be possible to store the maximum number of holdings. Hereinafter, the effect executed in such a case will be described.

  FIG. 178 shows that none of the reservations of special map 2 are accumulated until the end of the fluctuation (the fourth fluctuation of special chart 2 after the start of the time saving state) in which the holding charge effect is executed (that is, the end of the time saving state). It is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect in the case of. Note that, as described above, the fluctuation in which the hold charge effect is executed is a deviation fluctuation. (A) shows the state where the hold charge effect has started. In this state, there is no reservation for Toku-zu 2. Further, a right-handed display (middle) and a right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (B) shows a state after a lapse of a predetermined time in the fluctuation. During the change, when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the hold charge effect, the number of the special figure 2 is one or less (that is, there is no change of the special figure 2 for the sixth time from the start of the time saving state, When the final rock-paper-scissor production cannot be executed), a suspension failure display indicating that the suspension of special figure 2 could not be accumulated is displayed on the production display device 1600, such as "charge failure ..." in the figure. .. Both the right-handed display (middle) and the right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600 because the time saving state is changing and the holding of special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum. In addition, as described above, in the state where the special figure 2 is held up to the maximum, the right-handed display (middle) may be deleted from the effect display device 1600 even during the time saving state.

  (C) shows the state at the end of the fluctuation. The combination of decorative patterns that are out of order is displayed. In addition, as described above, the reserved charge effect is executed at the fourth variation of the special map 2 after the start of the time saving state. Further, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed four times after the start of the time saving state, the time saving state ends. Therefore, all right-handed displays have been deleted from the effect display device 1600. (D) shows the state after the end of the fluctuation. Since the time saving state has ended and the normal state has returned, the left-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 179 shows that the second hold of special map 2 is accumulated immediately before the end of the change in which the hold charge effect is executed (the change of the fourth special view 2 after the start of the time saving state) (that is, immediately before the end of the time saving state). It is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect in the case of. (A) shows the state where the hold charge effect has started. In this state, there is only one reservation for Toku-zu 2. Further, a right-handed display (middle) and a right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (B) shows a state after a lapse of a predetermined time in the fluctuation. During the change, at the time when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the hold charge effect, since there is only one hold in the special figure 2, the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as in FIG. 178 (B). It The other displays are the same as in FIG. 178 (B).

  (C ') shows the state in which the game ball B has entered the second starting opening 2004 after the change and the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The relevant ball is a ball corresponding to the sixth variation in Toku-zu 2 after the start of the time saving state. (D ') shows the state at the end of the fluctuation. The combination of decorative patterns that are out of order is displayed. Since the time saving state has ended, all right-handed displays have been deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  (E ') is a state in which the fifth variation of Toku-zu 2 which is a deviation variation has ended. As described above, when the fifth variation of the special figure 2 is a deviation variation, the variation time is 1 second, a special effect is not performed, and the combination of the deviations of the decorative symbols is stopped on the effect display device 1600. .. In addition, the hold failure display remains displayed on the effect display device 1600 even during the change.

  (F ') is a state in which the sixth variation of special figure 2 has started. In this way, when there is a ball corresponding to the sixth variation of the special figure 2 after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the revival effect is executed at the start of the sixth variation. In the example of (F ′), the dialogue “not finished yet!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and thereafter, the final rock-paper-scissor effect is started, as in FIG. 165 (P ′).

  In addition, for example, when the normal symbol lottery just before the end of the fourth variation of the special diagram 2 is won, the opening of the second starting opening 2004, and the entry of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 is concerned. It may occur immediately before the end of the change or immediately after the end of the change (that is, immediately after the end of the time saving state).

  If the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 after the suspension failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and by the time of the start of the fifth variation of Toku-zu 2, The revival effect may be executed at the changing time, and the final rock-paper-scissor effect may be started at the same time as the start of the sixth changing time of the special figure 2. Moreover, after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more remains until the end of the fourth fluctuation of the special figure 2, the game ball is on the second starting opening 2004. When B enters the ball, the revival effect is executed by the end of the fourth variation of special map 2, and the same effect as (E) is performed for the fifth variation of special map 2 (however, the pending failure display Is deleted from the effect display device 1600), and the final rock-paper-scissor effect may be started at the same time as the sixth variation of the special figure 2.

  Further, after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more remains until the end of the fourth variation of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 has the maximum hold ( 4), the hold failure display and right hit display (middle) are deleted from the effect display device 1600 in the fourth variation of Toku-zu 2 to show that the hold has been stored to the maximum. A display (for example, a display similar to that in FIG. 165 (N ′)) may be displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 179, since there is no suspension of the variation of the special figure 2 at the start of the sixth variation of the special figure 2, the final rock-paper-scissor production is performed using only the sixth variation of the special figure 2. That is, the result of the rock-paper-scissors game in the final rock-paper-scissor production is determined based on only the winning result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the sixth variation of the special map 2. When the final rock-paper-scissors production is performed using only the 6th variation of special figure 2, a display indicating that the first rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production as shown in FIG. 165 (Q ′) starts (“No. 1 battle !! ”) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, but since the special figure 2 is not already held, the display performed at the eighth variation of the special 2 when the holding charge effect is successful, that is, As shown in FIG. 166 (W ′), it is preferable that a display indicating that the last rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production starts (“final battle !!”) is displayed on the production display device 1600.

  In addition, when there are two pending changes of special map 2 at the end of the fifth fluctuation of special map 2, the final rock-paper-scissors production as a continuous performance using the sixth and seventh fluctuations of special map 2. Is done. That is, based on the winning result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the 6th variation and the 7th variation of the special figure 2, the winning, losing, and aiko of the rock-paper-scissors game in the final rock-paper-scissor production in the 6th fluctuation and the 7th fluctuation are determined. It

  When the final rock-paper-scissors production is performed using the 6th variation and the 7th variation of Toku-zu 2, the first rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production as shown in Fig. 166 (T ') starts at the 7th variation of Toku-zu 2 A display indicating that the game is to be performed (“second game in the figure!”) May be displayed on the effect display device 1600, but since the special figure 2 has not already been held, the special charge 2 when the hold charge effect is successful. On the effect display device 1600, that is, the display that is performed in the eighth change of, that is, the display indicating that the last rock-paper-scissors game of the final rock-paper-scissors production starts as shown in FIG. 166 (W ′) (“final battle !!”). It is preferable to be displayed.

  If the regular symbol lottery is won immediately before the end of the time saving state, the opening of the second starting port 2004 starts immediately before the end of the time saving state, but after the final opening of the second starting port 2004, the special figure 2 It is desirable that the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 and the stop time of the symbol are determined so that the fifth fluctuation of (3) starts. When the second starting port 2004 is opened after the start of the fifth variation of the special figure 2, the variation of the special figure 2 from the start of the time saving state (as described above, the small hit probability is set high in the special figure 2). This is because it may be executed 9 times or more, and the burden on the hole may increase.

  Specifically, the ordinary symbol lottery is performed during the time saving, the ordinary lottery result is the result (hit result) of opening the second starting opening 2004, and the state where the ordinary lottery result is obtained is not the time saving state. In the case of the normal state, it is preferable to use the opening pattern when the hit result is obtained in the normal state, not the opening pattern which is opened when the hit result is obtained in the time saving state. ..

  Even if the winning probability in the normal state is set to 0 (that is, even if the normal symbol lottery is never won in the normal state), it is remarkably necessary to prevent the burden on the hole from increasing. Prepare an opening pattern that makes winning difficult. Ordinary symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state, the ordinary lottery result is the result of opening the second starting opening 2004 (hit result), and the state where the ordinary lottery result is obtained is not the time saving state but the normal state. In the case of winning, it is preferable that the variation of Toku-zu 2 is executed 9 times or more from the start of the time saving state by executing an opening pattern in which winning is extremely difficult. It should be noted that the opening pattern that is extremely difficult to win is a time shorter than the opening pattern when the normal symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state and the hit result is obtained during the time saving state (for example, less than 1 second, 0 0.008 seconds).

  In addition, in this chapter, the special lottery results up to the 4th variation of Toku-zu 2 are basically announced by the stock time effect in the 1st variation of Toku-zu 2. However, for example, each variation of Toku-zu 2 In, the special lottery result corresponding to the change may be announced. Specifically, for example, in each variation (1st to 8th variation) of the special map 2, a rock-paper-scissors game production is performed, and the winning or losing of the special lottery result of the variation is notified according to the game result.

  In this case, for example, at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production in the Nth variation (N is an integer of 1 or more and 8 or less) of special figure 2, a display indicating that it is the Nth variation of special figure 2 (for example, " N battles !! ”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, it is a change in the special map 2 after the fifth change, which is a change in which the special map 2 is not held at the start of the change, and is a final change of the special map 2 at the start of the scissors game production. (For example, “final battle !!”) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, as described above, in the time saving state, the variation of Toku-zu 2 can be executed up to 8 times, so at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production in the N-th variation (N is an integer from 1 to 8) of Toku-zu, A display indicating that the rock-paper-scissors game is remaining (9-N) times (for example, "Round (9-N)!") May be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  When such a display is performed, if the maximum number (4) of special maps 2 is not accumulated at the end of the time saving state, the actual remaining number of fluctuations of the special maps 2 until the end of the time saving state and There is a discrepancy between the display of "Remaining (9-N) battle !!" displayed at the start of the game.

  For example, in the case where the holding of the special map 2 is not accumulated to the maximum by the end of the time saving state, the display at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production after the fifth change may be corrected. Specifically, for example, when the rock-paper-scissors game of the 4th variation of Toku-zu 2 starts, “5 more games left!” Is displayed, but when there are two pending Toku-zu 2 at the end of the time saving state, At the start of the 5th variation of rock-paper-scissors game production in Tokushu 2 "2 more games left!", And at the start of 6th variation in rock-paper-scissors game production of Tokushu 2 "1 game remaining !!" ("Final race !!") May be displayed) on the effect display device 1600.

  In this case, a disappearance effect may be executed in which the remaining number of rock-paper-scissors games disappears at the start of the fifth variation of rock-paper-scissors game production in Toku-zu 2. Specifically, for example, in the above-described example, since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed only twice less than the maximum number, the images of the two hands of the friend are temporarily displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the disappearance effect. And then erase. Further, in the disappearance effect in the above-described example, an effect may be performed in which the display of "2 remaining games !!" is corrected immediately after "4 remaining games !!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, for example, the display of "remaining 4 battles !!" may be made semitransparent or may be blurred.

  The disappearance effect and the normal rock-paper-scissors game effect may be executed in parallel. Specifically, for example, one of the disappearance effect and the normal rock-paper-scissors competition effect is displayed semi-transparently, or the display areas of the disappearance effect and the normal effect are displayed so as not to overlap with each other. Make both sides visible. In addition, the normal rock-paper-scissors game production may be executed after the disappearance production is executed.

  In addition, for example, when the reservation of special map 2 is not accumulated to the maximum by the end of the time saving state, the display at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production of the final fluctuation of special map 2 may be corrected. More specifically, for example, when the fourth variation of rock-paper-scissors game production of special map 2 is displayed, “5 remaining battles!” Is displayed, but when there are two pending special map 2 at the end of the time saving state. , "4 more games left" at the start of the 5th variation of rock-paper-scissors game production, and "1st race remaining" at the start of the 6-motion variation of rock-paper-scissors game production! May be displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the above-described disappearance effect may be executed at the start of the sixth variation of Toku-zu 2.

  Further, for example, even when the holding of the special map 2 is not accumulated up to the maximum by the end of the time saving state, the display at the start of the rock-paper-scissors competition production does not have to be corrected. Specifically, for example, when the special map 2 is held two at the end of the time saving state, when the rock-paper-scissors game production of the fifth variation of the special map 2 is started, "4 remaining games!" At the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production of the sixth variation, “3 remaining battles!” Is displayed on the production display device 1600. In this case, the disappearance effect described above may be executed at the end of the sixth variation of the special figure 2, and a display indicating that all the rock-paper-scissors-winning effects have ended may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, when notifying the special lottery result corresponding to the variation in each variation of the special figure 2 as described above, the variation time corresponding to the suspension of the special figure 2 during and after the time saving state is shown in FIG. 169. It suffices that a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected regardless of whether the hit, the small hit, or the big hit as shown.

[15. Decorative pattern freeze production]
In this chapter, the freezing effect of decorative patterns will be described. As described above, the main control MPU transmits the stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the end of the fluctuation. Further, the peripheral control MPU is in a state that suggests a combination of decorative patterns to be stopped in the effect display device 1600 until the stop display command is received from the main control MPU, but does not stop the decorative patterns (for example, each decorative pattern). A temporary stop state including a swing fluctuation display in which the entire design is displayed in a swinging manner), and the decorative design is stopped (fixed display) based on the reception of the stop display command.

  In the fixed display, if the display position of the entire decorative pattern does not move, a part of the decorative pattern changes (for example, the aura of the character displayed in the decorative pattern shakes, and It may be displayed as limbs move small).

  Further, in the confirmed display state, the peripheral control MPU displays the effect until it receives either the big hit start command, the small hit start command, or the next variation determination result notification command (variation start command) from the main control MPU. The decorative pattern is kept in the fixed display state in the device 1600. However, the peripheral control MPU, in the fixed display state immediately after the deviation change, if there is no suspension of the next fluctuation, until the waiting time designated in step S194 elapses, the effect display device 1600 completely displays the decorative pattern. It may be maintained in a stopped state (a state in which there is no change in a part of the decorative pattern described above), and thereafter, the position of the decorative pattern does not move, but a part of one decorative pattern may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol freeze effect is an effect in which the fixed display time is longer than usual, and is executed as a look-ahead effect. Further, the front light guide plate 2160 emits light according to the selected light emission schedule during the fixed display time when the decorative pattern freeze effect is executed. Note that the normal fixed display time during which the decorative symbol freeze design effect is not executed is 500 ms.

  FIG. 180 is an example of the fixed display time selection table. The fixed display time selection table defines the effect schedule for realizing the decorative symbol freeze effect. The fixed display time selection table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the main control board 1310. The fixed display time selection table includes, for example, a number column, a fixed display time column, a light emission schedule column, and a distribution column. The number column stores a number that uniquely identifies a record of the fixed display time selection table.

  The confirmed display time column stores the confirmed display time. The fixed display time in the big hit variation is the time from when the stop display command is set in step S182 to when the big hit start command is set in step S187. The fixed display time in the small hit variation is the time from the setting of the stop display command in step S182 to the setting of the small hit start command in step S191. Further, the fixed display time in the deviation variation is the time from the setting of the stop display command in step S182 to the end of the standby time in step S194. In the example of FIG. 180, the fixed display times stored in the fixed display time column are all longer than 500 ms (that is, the normal fixed display time during which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed), and are 1000 ms, 2000 ms, or 5000 ms.

  The light emission schedule column stores the light emission schedule, that is, the light emission mode of the front light guide plate 2160 in each period during the fixed display time. The distribution column stores the fixed display time and the distribution of the light emission schedule for each type of variation of the pre-determination target.

  The main control MPU, for example, executes the lottery using the confirmed display time selection table at a predetermined ratio in step S62 of the preliminary determination process. Specifically, for example, a hold other than the hold that is determined to execute the lookahead effect during the lookahead effect (specifically, for example, when it is decided to generate the lookahead effect at the time of the fourth hold winning) Probability that a decorative pattern freeze effect occurs due to a change corresponding to any of the first, second, and third hold) (that is, the fixed display time selection table is used in step S62 corresponding to the change). The probability that the selected lottery will be executed is 1/5 when the hold (the fourth hold in the above-described example) determined to execute the prefetch effect is out of sync, and 1/2 when the win is achieved. , It is preferable to increase the expectation of winning when the decorative pattern freeze effect is executed.

  In the lottery, the main control MPU selects the fixed display time and the light emission schedule from the fixed display time selection table based on the hit type and the distribution. Further, the main control MPU determines the variation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed, from the variation in execution and the variation in suspension (excluding the variation of the preliminary determination target). Further, the main control MPU determines the timing of setting the big hit start command or the small hit start command, or the standby time in step S194, based on the selected confirmed display time.

  In addition, the main control MPU notifies the peripheral control MPU of the information indicating the variation in which the decorative pattern freeze effect is executed and the selected light emission schedule in the advance determination command, and the peripheral control MPU is notified of the light emission schedule. Then, the front light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light.

  The fixed display time selection table may store only the fixed display time and the distribution of the fixed display time for each hit type. In this case, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 stores information indicating the light emission schedule for each fixed display time and the distribution of the light emission schedule. That is, in this case, the main control MPU notifies the peripheral control MPU of the information indicating the variation in which the decorative pattern freeze effect is executed and the selected fixed display time, and the peripheral control MPU sets the notified fixed display time. The light emission schedule is selected based on the above.

  Note that in the example of FIG. 180, the allocation is determined so that a long fixed display time can be easily selected in the order of deviation variation <small hit variation <big hit variation. Further, as a light emission mode of the front light guide plate 2160, a light emission schedule and distribution are set so that the expectation degree is blue <green <red, and the expectation degree increases as the number of times of light emission increases. That is, for example, the small hitting variation is higher than the outlying variation, and the large hitting variation is higher than the small hit variation, so that the selectivity of the light-emission manner having a higher expectation is higher, and the selectivity of the light-emission manner having a lower expectation is lower. In addition, the light emission schedule and the distribution are determined so that the number of times of light emission increases.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 180, in all the light emission schedules, it is determined that the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light (no light emission) in the period of 0 to 500 ms from the start of the fixed display. On the other hand, as described above, the normal fixed display time during which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed is 500 ms. Further, in the above-described example, the decorative symbol freeze effect as the look-ahead effect does not affect the effect during the change of the decorative symbol, and therefore the player cannot expect the occurrence of the decorative symbol freeze effect. Therefore, the player can know that the decorative design freeze effect is being executed only when the fixed display time exceeds 500 ms, and the expectation can be sharply increased.

  On the other hand, a decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect for suggesting or foretelling the appearance of the decorative pattern freeze effect may be executed. In the decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect, for example, the front light guide plate 2160 emits light. Further, in the decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect, for example, a meter and a line saying "Beyond the limit!" Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a display in which the meter is accumulated is displayed.

  In the decorative pattern freeze suggestive production, if the value of the meter rises to the maximum value of the meter, it shifts to the decorative pattern freeze production, and if the value of the meter does not rise to the maximum value of the meter even after the elapse of a predetermined time, the decoration The other effect is executed or the variation ends without shifting to the symbol freeze effect.

  Although the meter may be displayed on the decorative design in the effect display device 1600, it is desirable that at least a part of the decorative design is visible. By displaying in this way, the player can not only pay attention to the meter, but also by visually recognizing the decorative pattern, the player can directly enjoy seeing when the decorative pattern stops moving. .. That is, the decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect is an effect that is performed while the decorative pattern is changing.

  Note that, for example, the light emission time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative pattern freeze effect and the light emission time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect are the same. Since the light emission time is the same, the player who sees the light emission in the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect can easily associate the decorative pattern freeze effect.

  On the other hand, the light emission time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative pattern freeze production may be longer than the light emission time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative pattern freeze suggestion production. Since the light emission time of the decorative pattern freeze effect is longer, the expectation can be further increased in the decorative pattern freeze effect than in the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect. Further, the light emission time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative pattern freeze effect may be shorter than the light emission time of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect. Since the light emission time of the decorative design freeze effect is shorter, the player's sense of tension can be gradually increased before the decorative pattern freeze effect is entered.

  By executing the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect, the player can expect the execution of the decorative pattern freeze effect, and thus gradually increase the sense of expectation, so that the player is suddenly given excessive tension. There is no. In addition, in the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect, other light-emitting bodies such as a lamp provided in the door frame 3 and a lamp provided in various operation parts may emit light instead of or in addition to the front light guide plate 2160.

  In addition, the decorative symbol freeze suggestive effect may be performed a plurality of times by changing the special symbol once. For example, a pattern that produces a decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect before and after the reach occurs, a pattern that produces decorative pattern freeze suggestive effects multiple times before the reach occurs, or a pattern that occurs multiple times after the reach occurs There may be a pattern in which a decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect is generated.

  In the case where the decorative pattern freeze suggesting effect is performed a plurality of times with one change, for example, the lengths of the respective decorative pattern freeze suggesting effects may be the same or different. Since the lengths of the decorative pattern freeze suggestive productions of the plurality of times are all the same, the player can predict the end timing of the decorative pattern freeze suggestive production, so that the decorative pattern freeze production can be performed without excessive tension. You can wait for their appearance. Further, since there are different decorative pattern freeze suggestive effects having different lengths, the player cannot predict the end timing of the decorative pattern freeze suggestive effects. Therefore, at the time of ending the decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect. It can give a surprise to the player.

  In addition, when the decoration freeze suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times by one change, for example, the longest time length of the decoration pattern freeze suggestion effect of the plurality of times is shorter than the length of the decoration pattern freeze effect. .. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the player's expectation in the decorative pattern freeze effect rather than each decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect. On the other hand, the length of the longest time of the plurality of times of the decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect may be longer than the length of the decorative pattern freeze effect. As a result, the player's sense of tension can be increased in the longest decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect.

  In addition, when the decoration freeze suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times by one change, for example, the shortest time length of the decoration pattern freeze suggestion effect of the plurality of times is shorter than the length of the decoration pattern freeze effect. .. As a result, in the shortest decorative design freeze suggesting effect, the player's sense of tension is not excessively increased. On the other hand, the length of the shortest time among the plurality of times of the decorative pattern freeze suggesting effect may be longer than the length of the decorative pattern freeze effect. As a result, while increasing the tension over each decorative pattern freeze suggestion production, the decorative pattern freeze production immediately informs the special lottery result and unravels the tension increased by the decorative pattern freeze suggestion production at once. be able to.

  Moreover, when the decoration freeze suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times by one change, for example, the total time of the decoration pattern freeze suggestion effects of the plurality of times is shorter than the length of the decoration pattern freeze effect. As a result, since it is possible to smoothly proceed the decorative design freeze effect for a plurality of times and spend time for the decorative pattern freeze effect, the player can increase the expectation in the decorative pattern freeze effect. On the other hand, the total time of the plurality of times of the decorative pattern freeze suggestive effect may be longer than the length of the decorative pattern freeze effect. As a result, while increasing the tension over time for the decorative design freeze suggestion production multiple times, the decorative pattern freeze production immediately informs the special lottery result, and the tension increased by the decorative pattern freeze suggestion production. You can unravel at a stretch.

  The meter effect may be performed during the decorative symbol freeze effect. When the meter effect is performed during the decorative symbol effect, for example, the value of the meter is selected so that the value of the meter indicates the big hit expectation degree.

  Further, in the light emission schedule of the number N of the fixed display time selection table of FIG. 180, the front light guide plate 2160 emits light in a light emission pattern of blue, green, and red in the order of 500 ms to 2000 ms and no light emission in the first 500 ms, and 2000 ms No light emission occurs at 3500 ms, and the front light guide plate 2160 emits light again at the emission pattern at 3500 ms to 5000 ms. That is, in the light emission schedule of number N, the light emission of the front light guide plate 2160 having the same light emission pattern loops with a period of no light emission interposed. Further, the light emission schedule is selected only for the decorative symbol freeze effect corresponding to the variation of the winning or the variation of the small hit. As a result, when the front light guide plate 2160 emits light according to a specific light emission schedule having regularity, the hit is determined, so that the player can feel an uplifting feeling.

  It should be noted that during the period in which the front light guide plate 2160 of the decorative pattern freeze effect can emit light (that is, 500 ms or more after the start of the fixed display), the player can adjust the light amount (light emission intensity) of the front light guide plate 2160. Is desirable. Specifically, for example, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right in the period, the light amount increases, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the left, the light amount decreases. In accordance with this adjustment, a light emitter different from the front light guide plate 2160 (for example, a light emitter provided in a frame such as the door frame 3, a light emitter provided in a movable body on the game panel 1100 side, a game, etc. It is also possible to change the light amount of the light-emitting body that emits light from the rolling surface of the sphere B.

  Even if the central pressing operation unit 303a or the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b provided in the center of the rotation operation unit 302 is operated, the light emitting mode such as the light amount of the light emitting body such as the front light guide plate 2160 does not change. In other words, the peripheral control MPU sets the light emitting mode of the light emitter even when the input signal from the central pressing operation unit 303a or the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is received during the period when the front light guide plate 2160 during the decorative pattern freeze production can emit light. Although not changed, when the input signal from the rotation operation unit 302 is received, the light emitting mode of the light emitter is changed.

  In addition, during the period in which the front light guide plate 2160 during the decorative pattern freeze production can emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 that is an operation unit for changing the light emission mode of the light emitter, and the operation unit that does not change the light emission mode even if the operation is performed. The central pressing operation part 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b are located in the vicinity of each other. It should be noted that the phrase "different operating parts are located in the vicinity" as used herein means that the player is close enough to simultaneously touch the different operating parts with one hand (for example, a distance within 2 cm). Since these operation units are located in the vicinity, it is difficult for a player who has seen the decorative design freeze effect for the first time to easily determine which operation unit should be used to reduce the light amount.

  In this way, by making it difficult to reduce the amount of light in the decorative pattern freeze effect, it is possible to notify other players who have not seen the existence of the decorative pattern freeze effect, which has a high expectation for a big hit, to other players. The player can obtain a sense of expectation even if the decorative pattern freeze effect is first appearance in the subsequent game.

  Further, at this time, an index indicating the adjusted light amount may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. This makes it possible to select that the amount of light is increased when it is desired to appeal to the surrounding players that the decorative pattern freeze effect is being performed, and the amount of light is decreased when it is not desired to be appealed. In order to increase the feeling of tension, it is desirable that no sound be output (silence) during the decorative pattern freeze production.

  The index may be indicated by, for example, the same meter as the meter displayed in the decorative pattern freeze suggesting effect described above. Thereby, although the player has seen the meter in the decorative pattern freeze production, the player who sees the decorative pattern freeze suggestion production for the first time sees the meter in the decorative pattern freeze suggestion production for the first time. Can be noticed as an effect related to the decorative pattern freeze effect, and the expectation can be improved.

  Also, in the case of displaying the meter in the decorative pattern freeze suggestion effect that does not develop into the decorative symbol freeze effect, in order to maintain the player's expectation for a long time, the meter is continued even after the special symbol change ends. You may display it. Further, in order to surely let the player recognize that the decorative symbol freeze effect is being executed, the meter may be erased during the period of 0 to 500 ms of no light emission of the decorative symbol freeze effect.

  Note that, in the example of FIG. 180, the light emission schedule of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative pattern freeze effect is defined, but other light emitters may emit light in the decorative pattern freeze effect. Specifically, for example, in the decorative design freeze effect, a combination of the front light guide plate 2160 and the lamp provided on the door frame 3 may emit light. Hereinafter, the lamp provided on the door frame 3 is also referred to as a door frame lamp. The door frame lamp includes, for example, a lamp (LED) provided in the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, the handle unit 180, the dish decoration unit 250, and the like.

  For example, in the case of a light emission schedule in which the front light guide plate 2160, the door frame top unit 450, and the dish decoration unit 250 emit light in this order, the player's line of sight moves in the order of the center of the front, the upper side of the front, and the lower side of the front following these emission. Therefore, in the decorative pattern freeze effect, the player can enjoy the effect immediately after breathing even after the decorative pattern is frozen.

  Further, the decorative pattern freeze effect is, for example, a mode in which only the front light guide plate 2160 emits light (hereinafter, also referred to as light emission mode 1), and a mode in which the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp emit light (hereinafter, light emission mode 2). Light), and a mode in which only the door frame lamp emits light (hereinafter, also referred to as light emission mode 3). At this time, for example, it is desirable that the selection rate of each light emitting mode for each special lottery result is set such that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher in the order of light emitting mode 1 <light emitting mode 2 <light emitting mode 3.

  In addition, light emission in a plurality of light emitting modes among the light emitting modes 1, 2, and 3 may be performed in one decorative pattern freeze effect. Specifically, for example, the light emission schedule is a schedule including only the light emission mode 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as schedule 1), a schedule for emitting light in the light emission mode 2 after the light emission mode 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as schedule 2), a light emission mode. 1 includes a light emission mode 2 after 1 and a schedule (hereinafter, also referred to as schedule 3) for emitting light in the light emission mode 3 thereafter.

  In Schedule 1, the front light guide plate 2160 emits light, and the decorative design freeze effect ends. In Schedule 2, after the front light guide plate 2160 emits light, the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp emit light, that is, a series of effects in which the light of the front light guide plate 2160 spreads over the entire gaming machine is executed, resulting in a decorative pattern freeze effect. finish. In Schedule 3, after the front light guide plate 2160 emits light, the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp emit light, and then the door frame lamp emits light. That is, in Schedule 3, the light of the front light guide plate 2160 spreads over the entire gaming machine, and then a series of effects in which the light of the entire gaming machine is scattered and scattered to the door frame lamp that is the outer frame of the gaming machine is executed, and the decorative pattern is executed. Freeze production ends.

  Therefore, Schedule 1, Schedule 2, and Schedule 3 are executed up to the first stage of the stage-developed emission stage, the emission stage executed up to the second stage, and the third stage. Since it can be considered as a light emitting effect, it is desirable that the selection rate of each schedule is determined for each special lottery result so that the expectation for jackpots becomes higher in the order of schedule 1 <schedule 2 <schedule 3.

  In addition, it is preferable that a period of no light emission for a predetermined time is provided without ending the decorative pattern freeze immediately after the light emission of the light emission mode 1 of the schedule 1 and immediately after the light emission of the light emission mode 2 of the schedule 2. Further, it is desirable that a predetermined period of no light emission is provided between the light emission modes of schedule 2 and schedule 3. Thereby, the player can watch the decorative design freeze effect while feeling nervous about whether or not the light emitting mode is developed during the period without light emission.

  Further, in the schedule 3, light emission in the light emission mode 3 may be performed, and at the same time, a predetermined operation unit (eg, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302) operable by the player may be caused to emit light (that is, a decorative pattern). After a lapse of a predetermined time from the execution of the freeze effect, a predetermined operation unit operable by the player emits light). In addition, in the light emission effect of the operation unit in the schedule 3, the light emission may be performed only when the special condition is satisfied. As a special condition, for example, only when the special lottery result of the change of the prefetch target is a big hit, and the appearance rate is extremely low compared to other effects (for example, within a predetermined number of all effects (for example, 5th It is desirable that it is a so-called premium effect that the appearance rate is low). In this case, when the operation unit is operated, the emission color of the operation unit changes to rainbow color, and the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp may emit rainbow color. As a result, the player can be strongly associated with the fact that the big hit has been won.

  In addition, in the luminous effect of the operation unit in Schedule 3, the selection rate when the special lottery result is off is extremely low compared to other luminous effects, and the selection rate in the case of a big hit is compared to other luminous effects. It may be a so-called super hot effect that is not too low (this is also an example of the special condition described above). In the intense hot effect, when the operation unit is operated when the special lottery result is a big hit, for example, the same light effect as the premium effect described above is performed. Further, in the intense hot production, when the operation section is operated when the special lottery result is out of alignment, for example, the light emission of the operation section is turned off, and further, the front light guide plate 2160 and the door frame lamp are also turned off. It

  Moreover, in the light emission effect of the operation unit in the light emission mode 3 of schedule 3, when the operation unit is operated, a predetermined effect may be executed. It is desirable that the predetermined effect is a special effect that is not included in the effects that can be displayed based on the special lottery. This is because in the light emitting mode 3, only the door frame emits light, so that the player who has not noticed the light emission strongly attracts the attention. As the special effect, for example, a predetermined sound may be output from the speaker. The predetermined sound is, for example, an announcement sound indicating that the decorative pattern freeze effect is still continuing. In addition, the special effect is executed in the light emission effect of the operation unit in the light emission mode 3 of schedule 3 immediately before the timing or light emission of the operation unit, that is, before the operation unit is operated. Good.

  In the above-mentioned example, the example in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed as the prefetch effect is explained, but the decorative symbol is used as the normal effect other than the prefetch effect (that is, the effect indicating the special lottery result corresponding to the change in execution). A freeze effect may be executed.

  However, in this case, the peripheral control MPU, in the fixed display period of the decorative symbol freeze effect, even if there is a change in the big hit and the small hit, the decorative symbol that reminds the player that it is off (of the three decorative symbols, At least one is different from the other two), and during a predetermined period (for example, 500 ms) immediately before the end of the confirmed display period, for example, a lamp (for example, a confirmed lamp) that emits light only at the time of winning is emitted, or It announces that it is a hit by, for example, outputting a line indicating that it is present from various speakers. On the other hand, if the variation is out, in the fixed display period, the decorative pattern that reminds the player that it is out is stopped, and no hit notification is given. In a normal production other than the pre-reading production, the decorative pattern freeze production is executed, which may suggest that the variation may be a hit variation to a player who is discouraged by thinking that the variation is an outlying variation. It is possible to give a feeling of uplifting rapidly.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed as a normal effect other than the prefetch effect (that is, an effect indicating a special lottery result corresponding to a change in execution), in a variation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed, The rate at which the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped may be set to be higher than the variation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed. Examples of the combination of the specific decorative patterns include a combination in which all the decorative patterns are odd numbers or even numbers. In addition, the dedicated decorative pattern described as “freeze” may be stopped. The special symbol is a symbol that is not displayed when the special symbol is stopped in the special symbol fluctuation. In this case, for example, among the three decorative symbols to be stopped, it is preferable that the larger the number of the dedicated decorative symbols, the higher the degree of expectation that the decorative symbol freeze effect will occur. By stopping the combination of such decorative symbols, the player can expect the occurrence of the decorative symbol freeze effect after that although the decorative symbol of the out-of-shift variation has stopped.

  In addition, when the exclusive decorative pattern described as "freeze" can appear, the decorative pattern freeze effect may be executed only when the dedicated decorative pattern is displayed. That is, in this case, when a specific combination of decorative symbols (a combination other than the dedicated decorative symbol) is displayed, the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player clearly expect that the decorative symbol freeze effect will start.

  In this case, the main control MPU selects the fixed display time and the light emission schedule from the fixed display time selection table based on the hit type and the distribution. The selection process is performed immediately after step S132 if the big hit flag is set in step S131, and is performed immediately after step S136 if the big hit flag is not set in step S131. ..

  Further, the main control MPU determines the timing of setting the big hit start command or the small hit start command, or the standby time in step S194, based on the selected confirmed display time. Further, the main control MPU notifies the peripheral control MPU of the light emission schedule selected from the confirmed display time selection table in the determination result notification command in step S137 and notifies the peripheral control MPU of the front light guide plate 2610 according to the notified light emission schedule. Make it glow.

  The decorative pattern freeze effect may be changed on the way. Specifically, for example, when the game ball B enters the starting opening (the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) during the execution of the decorative symbol freeze effect, a predetermined probability (eg, 1/2) The decorative pattern freeze effect may be changed with and the one-shot notification effect may be performed. The one-shot notification effect is an effect in which the special lottery result is directly and immediately notified at the start of the effect. Further, the light emission of the light-emitting body such as the front light guide plate 2160 which has emitted light according to the schedule is stopped together with the effect change of the decorative pattern freeze effect.

  By enabling the change of the decorative pattern freeze effect, the player who wants to enjoy the decorative pattern freeze effect for a long time changes the light emission mode without inserting the game ball B into the starting opening (which schedule has been selected). The player who wants to know the special lottery result quickly can enter the game ball B into the starting opening and generate a one-shot notification effect.

  In addition, when the game ball B enters the starting opening during the execution of the decorative pattern freeze effect, the decorative pattern freeze effect is changed with a predetermined probability of less than 1 and the one-shot notification effect is performed (that is, the game ball). Even if the game ball B enters the starting port and the jackpot is not notified, the player maintains the expectation because the special lottery result is not necessarily notified even if B enters the starting port. be able to.

  For a player who wants to know the special lottery result quickly, it may be possible to select whether or not the effect during the decorative symbol freeze effect is the one-shot notification effect.

  Further, during the decorative design freeze production, in order to enjoy the freezing of the decorative design and the light emission of the light emitting body, it is desirable that there is no sound. Moreover, when the decorative pattern freeze effect is changed, a predetermined sound may be output. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the decorative pattern freeze effect has been changed. Further, light emission of the front light guide plate 2160 in the decorative pattern freeze effect described above is triggered by the operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302) during execution of the decorative pattern freeze effect. May end.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 180, the effect time of the decorative symbol freeze effect is 5000 ms at the maximum, but a long version of the decorative symbol freeze effect having a longer freeze time may exist. The freeze time in the decorative design freeze production of the long version is, for example, longer than the time of all other special pattern changes. In this case, for example, the long version of the decorative design freeze effect may include, for example, a schedule in which the illuminator continues to emit light for a time longer than the longest fluctuation time among all other fluctuations.

  Further, the long version of the decorative design freeze effect may be selected only when the special lottery result of the change of the prefetch target is a big hit. However, in this case, if the long version of the decorative pattern freeze effect frequently appears, the expectation of the player for the normal decorative pattern freeze effect does not decrease, so that, for example, about 1/10 of the appearance of the decorative pattern freeze effect is long. It is desirable that the distribution of productions is set so that the versions are created.

  In addition, since the long version of the decorative pattern freeze effect has a particularly long freeze time, the effect change of the decorative pattern freeze effect described above may be executable even in the long version.

  The decorative symbol freeze effect may be executed only in a specific effect state. Specifically, for example, the decorative symbol freeze effect may be executed only in the non-time saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol freeze effect, which takes a relatively long time, is not executed as the look-ahead effect, so that the game proceeds smoothly. Further, for example, it is desirable that the decorative pattern freeze effect is not executed overlapping with other prefetch effects, for example. This is because if the look-ahead effect other than the decorative pattern freeze effect is executed at the same time, the player cannot strongly impress the decorative pattern freeze effect. The non-time saving state is the most disadvantageous game state for the player among a plurality of game states such as low-probability non-time reduction and high-probability time reduction as the game state of the gaming machine.

  The visibility of the decorative pattern may be reduced after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol freeze effect. Specifically, for example, the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced by reducing the lightness or the saturation of the decorative pattern itself in the effect display device 1600 or the entire effect display device 1600. By reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern that does not move during the decorative pattern freeze production, the player's attention can be further focused on the light emission of the light emitter. In addition, at this time, the brightness of the light emission of a predetermined light emitting body may be lowered, which allows the player to pay attention to the light emission of the front light guide plate 2160. It should be noted that the decorative pattern may be completely invisible after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the decorative pattern freeze effect.

  In the example of FIG. 180, regardless of whether the hit type is a big hit, a small hit, or a hit, there is a distribution in both the schedule in which the front light guide plate 2160 emits the light and the schedule in which the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit. In the case of a hit, the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light, and in the case of a hit, the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light at the start of the decorative pattern freeze effect. Schedule and distribution so that the front light guide plate 2160 emits light after a predetermined time has elapsed. May be defined.

  That is, in this case, since the deviation is fixed when the front light guide plate 2160 emits light in the decorative pattern freeze production, the player watches the progress of the game in the expectation that the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light. ..

  In this case, as the schedule, for example, one pattern common to the big hit and the small hit, and one pattern for the off hit are prepared. In other words, if the special lottery result is decided, the schedule is decided without going through the lottery.

  Further, it is desirable that the time of the decorative pattern freeze effect in the case of a big hit or a small hit is set to be longer than the longest time in which the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light in the case of a deviation. As a result, the winning is determined when the longest time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol freeze effect, so that the player can watch the decorative symbol freeze effect with more tension.

  In the example of FIG. 180, only the front light guide plate 2160 is made to emit light in the decorative pattern freeze effect, but with the light emission of only the front light guide plate 2160, the player may not notice the light emission, so the decoration pattern is made. Even if the freezing effect is started, the light emitting mode of the door frame lamp or the like before the start of the decorative pattern freezing effect may be continued to emit light to appeal to the player that the decorative pattern freezing effect has been started.

[16. Judge production]
[16-1. Pointing direction]
Hereinafter, the preceding instruction effect executed during the judge effect will be described. The judge effect is an effect that announces a special lottery result corresponding to the change, among effects executed during the change of the special symbol. FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the first instruction effect. Hereinafter, it will be described that the first instruction effect is executed in a variation in which the winning is won. (A) is a state in which reach is applied in the big hit variation. (B) is a state in which the reach effect has started. During the reach production, a rock-paper-scissors game production, which is a judge production, is performed, and if the variation is a hit variation, the game of rock-paper-scissors is won.

  (C) is a state during reach production. On the effect display device 1600, a right-handed display for urging the so-called right-handed execution is displayed in parallel with the judge effect ("Janken ..." in the figure) during the reach effect. The second special winning opening 2006 is not opened because it is a normal state during the change, but the second special winning opening 2006 is opened during the big hit game, so a right strike is executed and a game is performed. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed display as the first instruction in the variation during the normal state, it is possible to remind the player that the jackpot game will start after the variation, and the player's expectation for the jackpot. Will increase.

  In addition, it is desirable that the right-handed display in the preceding instruction effect is different from the right-handed display (the right-handed display (large) described above, etc.) displayed in the big hit game, the small hit game, and the time saving state. If these are the same mode of display, it is more likely that the player will mistakenly recognize the game state and actually start right-handing, which in turn reduces the number of balls thrown, which is disadvantageous to the player. This is because the possibility increases.

  In the previous instruction effect, the image of the second special winning opening 2006 may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 together with the right hit display in order to strongly associate the player with the big hit. In the previous instruction effect, the images of the first special winning opening 2005 and the second starting opening 2004 may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 together with the right-handed display. As a result, it is possible to make the player associate the small hit and the time saving state.

  (D) is a state during the reach production, which is a continuation of (C). When a predetermined time has elapsed after the right-handed display is displayed, the right-handed display is highlighted on the effect display device 1600 in a more recognizable manner (larger in the drawing). At the same time as the highlighting is performed, a sound such as “What are you doing? Right hitting!” May be output from the speaker. Note that in the example of FIG. 181, the right-handed display is changed in two steps, that is, the small right-handed display in (C) and the large right-handed display in (D), but gradually changes after three or more steps. May be highlighted.

  (E) is a state during the reach effect that is a continuation of (D). A teammate character has won a rock-paper-scissors game against an enemy character. Also in (E), the highlighted right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that, as in (C) to (E), the effect images of the first instruction effect and the judge effect are visible on the effect display device 1600 at positions where both can be visually recognized (for example, the distance between the center positions of both effect images is It is desirable to be displayed above a predetermined value. When the effect images of the first directed effect and the judge effect are displayed at the overlapping positions on the effect display device 1600, the effect image of the first directed effect is displayed prior to the effect image of the judge effect (for example, on the front side). Is desirable. In addition, in (C) to (E), the light emitting modes of the various light guide plates and the various lamps are not the light emitting modes in the judge effect, but the light emitting modes according to the preceding instruction effect (for example, the right part of the game board is provided. It is desirable that the lamp is on).

  (F) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the decorative patterns for the big hit is stopped, and a display indicating that the big hit is won (“big hit! Congratulations!” In the figure) is displayed. As in (F), it is desirable that the right-handed display in the previous instruction effect is erased from the effect display device 1600 when the change ends.

  Even before the end of the variation, for example, the game ball B makes the gate portion 2003 (or the general winning opening 2001 that can enter the game ball B only when the player hits the ball right) a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). When it passes, when the handle 182 rotates by a predetermined angle (for example, the maximum rotatable angle of the handle 182) or more, or when the one-shot button 193 of the handle 182 is pressed, the right-handed display in the preceding instruction effect is the effect display device. It is desirable to erase from 1600.

  In FIG. 181, an example in which the first instruction effect is executed in the hit variation has been described, but the first instruction effect may be executed in the deviation variation. However, in the case where the preceding instruction effect is executed even in the out-of-direction variation, the prior instruction effect in the hit variation and the out-of-direction variation is set so that the expectation of hitting when the preceding instruction effect occurs is high (for example, 50% or more). It is desirable that the distribution be decided.

  In addition, it is desirable that the preceding instruction effect in the deviation variation be executed only in the time saving state. When right-handedness is executed according to the previous instruction effect in the out-of-range variation in the normal state, the game ball B is difficult to enter the first starting opening 2002, and the variation is out-of-range variation, which makes the player uncomfortable. Because it will be.

  However, if the right-handing is continued even in the time saving state, the increase speed of the game ball B is slower than that during the big hit or the game ball B decreases. For example, the right-handing display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. If a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, a time shorter than the time from the display of the right-handed display until the symbol is fixed in the change), the right-handed display may be deleted from the effect display device 1600. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 10 shots) of game balls B are shot after the right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the holding of the special map 2 is accumulated up to the maximum (4), The right-handed display may be deleted from the effect display device 1600. As described above, it is desirable that the display time of the right-handed display is limited to some extent.

  In addition, for example, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is not accumulated up to the maximum at the start of the fluctuation or after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the first instruction effect may be performed. If the number of holdings of special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum, even if the player hits right according to the right hit display in the preceding instruction effect, the game ball B is won by winning the game ball B in the second starting opening 2004. This is because not only the player can receive the special payout but also the special lottery of the special diagram 2, so that no disadvantageous situation occurs for the player.

[16-2. Judge production using multiple operating parts]
Hereinafter, the judge effect using a plurality of operation units will be described. FIG. 182 (A) is a front view showing an example of a simplified configuration of a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a performance operation lever, and FIG. 182 (B) is a simplified pachinko machine 1 equipped with a performance operation lever. It is a left side view which shows an example of the performed structure. For convenience of description, illustration is omitted except for the configuration necessary for explaining the production operation lever. In addition, the dimensions and shapes of the illustrated configuration are also exaggerated and simplified.

  In this chapter, the pachinko machine 1 further includes a performance operation lever 304, a performance operation lever sensor 305, and a confirmation lamp 306. The effect operation lever 304 is attached to the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300, for example. The effect operation lever 304 can be tilted to the front side when viewed from the player. That is, based on the instruction displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the like, it is possible to execute an effect that is advanced by the player pulling the effect operation lever 304 to the front side.

  The effect operation lever sensor 305 is attached to, for example, the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 (it does not need to be attached to the effect operation lever 304, that is, it is arranged in a region different from the effect operation lever 304). ing). Furthermore, the production operation lever sensor 305 is located closer to the front side than the initial position of the production operation lever 304 (the state where the tip of the lever faces the vertical direction), and detects that the production operation lever 304 has tilted to the front side. The effect operation lever sensor 305 is attached to a position where detection can be performed only when the effect operation lever 304 is tilted forward by a predetermined angle (for example, 20 degrees) or more.

  The confirmation lamp 306 is attached, for example, above the game board 5. The confirmation lamp 306 is lit, for example, when the variation being executed or the variation being held includes a variation and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, the confirmation lamp 306 is in a state in which, for example, a character such as “confirmation” indicating that the hit is confirmed can be satisfactorily visually recognized when turned on.

  183 and 184 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a judge effect using a plurality of operation units. FIG. 183 (A) shows a state in which reach is applied in the big hit variation. (B) is a state in which the reach effect has started, and a state in which the opening effect of the judge effect has started. In the reach production, the rock-paper-scissors game production, which is a judge production, is performed, and if the variation is a hit variation, the game is won, and if the variation is an outlying variation, the game is lost.

  (C) is a state during the reach effect, in which the opening effect of the judge effect is finished and the main effect of the judge effect is started. The effect display device 1600 displays the judge effect (“Janken ...” in the figure) during the reach effect. (D) is a state during the reach production, which is a continuation of (C). On the effect display device 1600, an image that urges the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed and an image that urges the effect operation lever 304 to tilt toward the front side (that is, an image that urges an operation on a different operation unit) are displayed. ..

  (E) is a state during the reach effect that is a continuation of (D), and is a state after the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. The operation valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts from the time when the display prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The end of the operation valid period is, for example, before the timing when the winning is announced in the judge effect (the timing when the hand of the ally character and the hand of the enemy character are displayed).

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, for example, in the effect display device 1600, the image prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is erased, and the image of the hand of the teammate character and the "chance" are displayed. "!" And cut in. Further, the operation valid period is forced to end. It should be noted that the colors of the cut-in image and the characters (for example, the winning probability increases in the order of blue, green, and red) differ according to the winning probability (coloring is omitted in FIG. 183). ). That is, in the judge effect, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, information indicating the hitting expectation degree in the fluctuation is announced. If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed during the operation valid period, the image prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is deleted from the effect display device 1600 at the end of the operation valid period. ..

  (F) is a state where the reach effect is being continued from (E), and is a state after the effect operation lever 304 is tilted toward the front side by a predetermined angle or more. After the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 to the front side, the effect operation lever 304 is at a predetermined angle or more (that is, the effect operation lever sensor 305 can detect the effect operation lever 304 tilt). When tilted to the front (at a certain angle or more), the display is deleted in the effect display device 1600. Further, the confirmation lamp 306 is turned on only when the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation.

  In other words, due to the tilting of the effect operation lever 304, a complete notification effect of winning or losing in the fluctuation is generated. The complete notification effect is performed by the confirmation lamp 306 and does not affect the winning notification effect in the judge effect. Although the operation effective period of the effect operation lever 304 is not defined (effective until the end of the fluctuation), even when the effect operation lever 304 is not tilted to the front side, by the end of the fluctuation, It is desirable that the display for prompting the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 to the front side is deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  Since some players want to enjoy complete notification without looking at the display indicating the expectation of hit, even when conditions other than the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a are satisfied, the effective operation period of the central pressing operation unit 303a May be forcibly ended and the image urging the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed may be deleted from the effect display device 1600. As the condition, for example, a specific operation with respect to the operation unit other than the central pressing operation unit 303a and the effect operation lever 304 (for example, rotating the rotation operation unit 302 two times to the right and then one rotation to the left), the first The game ball B wins at the starting opening 2002, the game ball B wins at the second starting opening 2004, the special figure 1 hold is accumulated up to (4), and the special figure 2 hold is maximum (4). And so on.

  On the other hand, since some players want to enjoy the judge effect until the end of the change only by the effect indicating the hit expectation degree without relying on complete notification, conditions other than the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 to the front side (for example, the same as the above condition). Even when the above condition is satisfied, the operation of the effect operation lever 304 may be invalidated, and the image prompting the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 to the front side may be deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, in (D), two images prompting the operation of the operation unit are displayed at the same time, but the image prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a in which the operation valid period is set is first displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when a predetermined time elapses or when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, an image that prompts the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 whose operation effective period is not fixed to the front side is displayed. It may be displayed in 1600.

  On the contrary, the effect display device 1600 may display an image that prompts the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 for which the operation effective period is not set to the front side. However, in this case, the effect for prompting the operation for executing the complete notification is displayed before the effect for prompting the operation for notifying the degree of expectation. Since some players are not so interested in the chance production after confirming the complete notification, an image prompting the central operation portion 303a to be pressed after the image prompting the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side is displayed. The time until the display of is shorter than the time from the start of the main effect of the judge effect (FIG. 183 (C)) to the display of the image prompting the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side (for example, Within 3 seconds) is desirable. Further, for the same reason, it is preferable that the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 to the front side is not a necessary condition for displaying an image prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a.

  The period during which the image for prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed may not necessarily match the operation valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, the beginning of the period is preferably before the beginning of the operation valid period, and the end of the period is preferably after the end of the operation valid period. Further, it is desirable that the display period of the image is secured for 5 seconds or more, for example.

  Further, the display time of the image prompting the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 to the front side may be longer or shorter than the display time of the image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. In addition, the display time may be set so that the longer the expectation is, the higher the expectation is, or the display time may be fixed (that is, the display time does not depend on the special lottery result). In addition, when the change is a hit change, a complete notification effect is executed so that the complete notification effect is executed when the effect operation lever 304 is operated without displaying an image prompting the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 to the front side. The announcement effect itself may be a hidden effect.

  In addition, in (D), the two images that prompt the user to operate the operation unit are displayed at non-overlapping positions on the effect display device 1600, but they may be displayed at overlapping positions. In this case, the display priority of the image urging the production operation lever 304 to tilt toward the near side of the effect operation lever 304 for which the operation valid period is not set is higher than that of the image for pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a where the operation valid period is set. It is better to raise it (for example, display it on the near side).

  In addition, the image that prompts the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 for which the operation valid period is not set may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. The specific conditions include that the reservation of Toku-zu 1 is not accumulated to the maximum and the reservation of Toku-zu 2 is not accumulated to the maximum. If the holding of the special symbol fluctuation is not accumulated up to the maximum, even if the game ball B is left to be hit during the operation of the effect operation lever 304 according to the display, the over-winning to the starting opening ( Such a condition is set because it takes time to generate the game ball B entering the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol variation in a state where the holding of the special symbol variation is accumulated to the maximum). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an opportunity for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  Further, for example, when the condition (detection by the production operation lever sensor 305) that can be achieved based on the operation of the production operation lever 304 is satisfied, the production operation lever for which the operation effective period is not determined. It is not necessary to display the image that prompts the user to lean toward 304. In a hit variation in which an image that prompts tilting of the effect operation lever 304 for which the operation effective period is not defined is displayed, the effect operation lever sensor 305 performs detection before the display of the image. In that case, the confirmation lamp 306 may be turned on without displaying the image.

  In addition, if the player recognizes that the display effect of the image prompting the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side is not executed when the suspension of the special symbol variation is accumulated, the player is over-winned. It is possible to proceed with the game so as not to cause the occurrence, and thus reduce the chance of suffering a disadvantage.

  Further, the display timing of the image prompting the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side may be different depending on the number of holdings of the special diagrams 1 and 2. Specifically, for example, the smaller the number of reservations, the earlier the display start timing of the image. Further, the image prompting the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 toward the front side may be set to be displayed only during the change in the advantageous state (during the probability changing state or the time saving state).

  Note that in the example of FIG. 183, the image of the effect operation lever 304 is displayed, but as described above, the effect operation lever 304 must be tilted to the front side by an angle that can be detected by the effect operation lever sensor 305. , The confirmation lamp 306 does not light up even if there is a variation in the hit. Therefore, in order to make the player understand how far the production operation lever 304 should be tilted, instead of or in addition to the image of the production operation lever 304, an image of a unit equipped with the production operation lever sensor 305 (production operation (Including an image of only the lever sensor 305) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  It should be noted that a condition (detection by the production operation lever sensor 305) that can be achieved based on the operation of the operating means, rather than displaying the actual operating means (production operating lever 304) that the player actually operates. Needless to say, the concept of displaying is not limited to the effect operation lever 304 and its sensor. For example, a condition that can be achieved based on a predetermined operation performed on an operation medium (for example, the central pressing operation unit 303a, the handle 182, etc.) that can be operated by a player different from the effect operation lever 304. (Display indicating how far the central pressing operation unit 303a should be pressed, how far the handle 182 should be turned, or where the target should be hit, etc.) may be displayed.

  FIG. 184 (G) shows a state during the reach effect, which is a continuation of FIG. 183 (F). A teammate character has won a rock-paper-scissors game against an enemy character. Also in (G), the confirmation lamp 306 remains lit. (H) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the decorative patterns for the big hit is stopped, and a display indicating that the big hit is won (“big hit! Congratulations!” In the figure) is displayed. Also in (H), the confirmation lamp 306 remains lit. The confirmation lamp 306 is turned off at a predetermined timing after the symbol is confirmed and before the big hit game is started.

[17. How to count the number of game balls entering the big winning hole in the winning round]
185 and 186 are schematic diagrams showing an example of the internal structure of the second special winning opening 2006. In this chapter, the internal structure of the second special winning opening 2006 will be described, but the internal structure of the first special winning opening 2005 may be the same. In the second special winning opening 2006, for example, a first game ball detection switch 2080, a second game ball detection switch 2082, and a clune member 2084 are provided.

  The first game ball detection switch 2080 is a switch that detects passage of the game ball B, and is provided, for example, immediately below the second special winning opening 2006. The first game ball detection switch 2080 is, for example, a penetration type proximity switch having a passage hole 2091 through which only one game ball B can pass.

  The clune member 2084 is provided below the first game ball detection switch 2080. The clune member 2084 has, for example, a dish shape in which the central portion is recessed downward, and the dish surface has an area in which a plurality of game balls B (for example, five) can be retained. Also, for example, as in the example of FIG. 186, the clune member 2084 has three passage holes 2085 through which the game ball B can pass in the center of the dish surface. Note that FIG. 185 shows an example of a state in which the second special winning opening 2006 is not opened, and FIG. 186 shows that the second special winning opening 2006 is opened and a ball enters the second special winning opening 2006. It shows an example of a state in which the three game balls B played are retained on the clune member 2084.

  The second game ball detection switch 2082 is a switch that detects passage of the game ball B, and is provided, for example, immediately below the passage hole 2085 of the clune member 2084. The second game ball detection switch 2082 is, for example, a penetration type proximity switch having a passage hole 2083 through which the three game balls B can pass. In the example of FIG. 185, one second game ball detection switch 2082 is provided for the three passage holes 2085 of the clune member 2084, but one second game ball detection switch is provided for each passage hole 2085. 2082 may be provided.

  In the example of FIG. 185, when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened, the game ball B enters the second special winning opening 2006. After that, the game balls B sequentially pass through the passage holes 2081 of the first game ball detection switch 2080, and the first game ball detection switch 2080 detects the passage of the game ball B.

  Then, the game ball B that has passed through the passage hole 2081 of the first game ball detection switch 2080 moves onto the clune member 2084. Since the central portion of the dish surface of the clune member 2084 is hollow, the game ball B moves to the central portion of the clune member 2084 while remaining in the clune member 2084, and passes through any of the three passage holes 2085. Then, the game ball B that has passed through the passage hole 2085 of the clune member 2084 passes through the passage hole 2083 of the second game ball detection switch 2082, and the second game ball detection switch 2082 detects the passage of the game ball B.

  When the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in each round of the big hit or the small hit game, the main control MPU determines that a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the second big winning opening 2006, or the second big winning opening 2006. When it is determined that at least one of the fact that at least one of the second special winning openings 2006 of the game balls B has been entered from the opening is satisfied, the second special winning opening 2006 is closed and the round is ended.

  Hereinafter, an example of a method of counting the number of game balls B entered into the second special winning opening 2006 in each round by the main control MPU will be described. The main control MPU counts the number of game balls detected by each of the first game ball detection switch 2080 and the second game ball detection switch 2082 in each round. Further, the main control MPU determines the payout of the game ball B according to the number detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082.

  When the main control MPU determines that the number of game balls B detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 after the round has started reaches the specified number, the main control MPU closes the second special winning opening 2006. Further, the main control MPU calculates the difference obtained by subtracting the number detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 from the number detected by the first game ball detection switch 2080 after the start of the round.

  After closing the second big winning opening 2006, the main control MPU verifies whether or not the value of the difference is zero. Main control MPU, the value of the difference is not zero (that is, there is a game ball that has passed the first game ball detection switch 2080 but has not passed the second game ball detection switch since the start of the round). When it is determined, even when the second round starts and the second special winning opening 2006 is opened, the count of the number of game balls B detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the newly started round is counted. Do not start, continue calculating the value of the difference in the previous round.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that the value of the difference is zero, the main control MPU ends the calculation of the value of the difference in the round, and when a new round is started, a new round is started. The counting of the detection of the game ball B by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in is started, and the difference obtained by subtracting the detection number by the second game ball detection switch 2082 from the detection number by the first game ball detection switch 2080 in the new round Start calculating the value.

  The above-described detection number counting process of the game ball B in the round will be described using a specific example. For example, consider a case where the specified number in each round is 10. For example, when the main control MPU determines that the number of game balls B detected in the first round by the second game ball detection switch 2082 has reached 10, the main control MPU closes the second special winning opening 2006. However, since there is a time lag between the 10th game ball entering the second special winning opening 2006 and the second special winning opening 2006 being closed since the start of the first round, in the first round There is a possibility that more than the specified number of game balls B will enter the second special winning opening 2006.

  For example, after the number of detected game balls B in the first round of the second game ball detection switch 2082 reaches 10, and before the closing of the second prize hole 2006, one game ball B is the second prize hole. It is assumed that the player entered 2006. That is, it is assumed that 11 game balls B have entered the second special winning opening 2006 before the second special winning opening 2006 is closed in the first round. Further, it is assumed that a round interval of a predetermined second has elapsed while the one game ball B stays in the clune member 2084, and the second round, which is the next round of the first round, has started.

  In this case, at the start of the second round, the difference between the number detected by the first game ball detection switch 2080 and the number detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 after the start of the first round is 1, so that At the start of the second round, the main control MPU does not start counting the number of detected game balls B by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the second round, and continues to calculate the value of the difference in the first round. However, the main control MPU starts counting the number detected by the first game ball detection switch 2080 from the start of the second round.

  When one game ball is detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 after the start of the second round, the difference becomes zero, so the main control MPU ends the calculation of the value of the difference in the first round. , The count of a specified number by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the second round, and the number of detections by the second game ball detection switch 2082 from the number of detections by the first game ball detection switch 2080 after the second round is started. The calculation of the subtracted difference value is started.

  In other words, in this example, 11 game balls B entered until the second big winning opening 2006 was closed in the first round, but the number of detected game balls B by the second game ball detection switch 2082 was 11. The count of the number detected by the second game ball detection switch 2082 in the second round is not started until the number of pieces is reached. Therefore, in addition to being able to receive payouts for all 11 game balls B that have entered the second big winning opening in the first round (so-called over-winning), a predetermined number (10) or more of games in the second round as well. You can get paid out for the entry of ball B.

  On the other hand, in the above-mentioned example, if the count of the prescribed number of game balls B in the second round starts at the same time as the start of the second round, one game ball B that should have been over-winned in the first round Will be counted as the prescribed number in the second round, so that the number of game balls B that can be obtained by the player will be reduced as compared with the example described above.

  As described above, the main control MPU uses the second game ball detection switch 2082 based on the number detected by the first game ball detection switch 2080 after the start of the round after closing the second special winning opening 2006. It is verified whether the difference value obtained by subtracting the number of detections is zero, but only when the round interval of a predetermined second elapses and it is determined that the difference value becomes zero in the verification, the following You may make it start a round. That is, the main control MPU does not start the next round until it determines that the value of the difference becomes zero, even if it is determined that the predetermined second round interval has elapsed after the second special winning opening 2006 is closed.

  As described above, according to the method for counting the game balls B described in this chapter, when a predetermined number or more of the game balls B enter the second special winning opening 2006 in each round, all the game balls B entered are in the round. The game ball B can be obtained as a payout in, that is, it is always treated as an over-winning prize.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused together, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1600 Performance display device 2006 Second prize hole 2080 First game ball detection switch 2082 Second game ball detection switch 2084 Clune member 3000 Back unit 3300 Upper front movable performance Unit 3301 Unit base 3302 Upper front drive motor (drive motor)
3303 First link rod 3304 Second link rod (link member)
3305 upper stopper 3306 lower stopper 3350 upper front movable decorative body 3351 central decorative body (main decorative body)
3352 First protruding decorative body (sub decorative body unit)
3352a First protruding decorative portion (sub decorative body)
3352b First connecting rod (connecting member)
3352c Link mounting portion 3353 Second protruding decorative body (sub decorative body unit)
3353a Second protruding decorative portion (sub decorative body)
3353b Second connecting rod (connecting member)
3353c Link mounting part

Claims (1)

A lottery means for performing lottery on winning and losing,
An opening and closing winning port equipped with an opening and closing member at a predetermined position in the game area,
A gaming machine comprising: an opening / closing means for opening the opening / closing member when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
When the opening / closing member is opened, the game medium passes through the first passage opening, and the game medium passing through the first passage opening passes through the second passage opening different from the first passage opening. Is designed to pass through,
First detection means for detecting that the game medium has passed through the first passage opening;
Second detection means for detecting that the game medium has passed through the second passage opening;
First counting means for counting the number of game media detected by the first detecting means,
Second counting means for counting the number of game media detected by the second detecting means,
A determination unit that determines a difference between the number counted by the first counting unit and the number counted by the second counting unit,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the opening / closing member is opened after waiting for the difference determined by the determining means to become "0".